Rohde & Schwarz ZND-K1 User Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Rohde & Schwarz Manuals
  4. Measuring Instruments
  5. ZND-K1
  6. User manual

Rohde & Schwarz ZND-K1 User Manual

Vector network analyzers
Hide thumbs
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
®
R&S
ZND
Vector Network Analyzers
User Manual
(;×íÇ2)
1173955702
Version 63
Ihr Ansprechpartner /
Your Partner:
dataTec AG
E-Mail: info@datatec.eu
>>> www.datatec.eu

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the ZND-K1 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Related Manuals for Rohde & Schwarz ZND-K1

Summary of Contents for Rohde & Schwarz ZND-K1

  • Page 1 ® R&S Vector Network Analyzers User Manual Ihr Ansprechpartner / Your Partner: dataTec AG E-Mail: info@datatec.eu >>> www.datatec.eu (;×íÇ2) 1173955702 Version 63...
  • Page 2 ● ® R&S ZN-B19 "Additional Removable SSD", order no. 1338.1703.02 Software Options ● ® R&S ZND-K1 "Frequency range extension to 8.5 GHz for unidirectional instrument", order no. 1328.5306.02 ® ® (not compatible with R&S ZND-K5 and R&S ZND-K8) ● ®...

  • Page 3: Table Of Contents

    ® Contents R&S Contents 1 Safety and regulatory information............13 Safety instructions......................13 Warning messages in the documentation..............15 Korea certification class A..................16 2 Welcome to the R&S ZND..............17 What's new in firmware version 3.50.................17 Documentation overview....................19 2.2.1 Getting started manual....................19 2.2.2 User manual and help....................
  • Page 4 ® Contents R&S Operating the instrument................... 39 3.3.1 Manual operation......................39 3.3.2 Control elements of the application window..............44 3.3.3 Working with dialogs..................... 50 3.3.4 Handling diagrams, traces, and markers..............51 3.3.5 Entering data.........................55 3.3.6 Scaling diagrams......................58 Performing measurements..................64 3.4.1 Transmission S-parameter measurement..............64 3.4.2 Reflection S-parameter measurement................
  • Page 5 ® Contents R&S 4.4.3 Memory-mapped trace data transfer................143 Calibration......................... 145 4.5.1 Calibration types......................146 4.5.2 Calibration standards and calibration kits..............157 4.5.3 Calibration pool......................163 4.5.4 Calibration labels......................163 4.5.5 Automatic calibration....................164 4.5.6 Scalar power calibration....................176 4.5.7 Parallel calibration of multiple channels..............181 4.5.8 Joining calibrations......................181 Offset parameters and de-/embedding..............
  • Page 6 ® Contents R&S 4.7.20 External switch matrices..................... 220 4.7.21 External DLLs......................226 4.7.22 R&S ZNXSIM......................228 5 GUI reference..................232 Function Keys and Softtools................... 232 Meas softtool......................234 5.2.1 S-Params tab......................235 5.2.2 Ratios tab........................244 5.2.3 Wave tab........................247 5.2.4 Z←Sij tab........................250 5.2.5 Y←Sij tab........................
  • Page 7 ® Contents R&S Lines softtool......................318 5.6.1 Limit Test tab....................... 318 5.6.2 Ripple Test tab......................326 5.6.3 Circle Test tab......................331 5.6.4 Display Circle tab......................334 5.6.5 Horiz. Line tab......................335 Marker softtool......................336 5.7.1 Markers tab......................... 336 5.7.2 Marker Props tab......................339 5.7.3 Marker Search tab.......................341 5.7.4...
  • Page 8 ® Contents R&S 5.11.4 Use Cal tab......................... 436 5.12 Channel Config softtool....................441 5.12.1 Channels tab....................... 442 5.12.2 Port Config tab......................446 5.12.3 Mode tab........................450 5.13 Offset Embed softtool....................451 5.13.1 Offset Embed dock widget..................451 5.13.2 Offset tab........................461 5.13.3 One Way Loss tab.......................467 5.13.4 Single Ended tab......................469 5.13.5...
  • Page 9 ® Contents R&S 5.16.4 View Bar tab........................ 550 5.16.5 Touchscreen tab......................551 5.17 Setup softtool......................552 5.17.1 Setup tab........................552 5.17.2 Freq. Ref. tab......................577 5.17.3 Remote Settings tab....................578 5.17.4 External Devices tab....................581 5.17.5 External Ports tab......................588 5.18 Help softtool......................596 5.19 Additional Function Keys..................597 6 Remote control...................599...
  • Page 10 ® Contents R&S 6.5.1 Overview of status registers..................621 6.5.2 Structure of a SCPI status register................622 6.5.3 Contents of the status registers.................. 624 6.5.4 Application of the status reporting system..............630 6.5.5 Reset values of the status reporting system............... 633 7 Command reference................635 Special terms and notation..................
  • Page 11 ® Contents R&S 7.4.1 SNMP/REST commands................... 1122 7.4.2 System information commands................. 1126 7.4.3 Device tags commands..................... 1136 7.4.4 Utilization commands....................1137 7.4.5 Service date commands.................... 1144 R&S ZVR/ZVABT compatible commands.............. 1146 8 Programming examples..............1170 Basic tasks.......................1170 8.1.1 Typical stages of a remote control program.............. 1170 8.1.2 Channel, trace and diagram handling................1173 Condensed programming examples..............
  • Page 12 ® Contents R&S 12.1.1 Firmware installation....................1213 12.1.2 Remote operation in a LAN..................1214 12.2 System recovery..................... 1218 12.3 Interfaces and connectors..................1218 12.3.1 Rear panel connectors....................1218 12.3.2 LAN interface......................1220 12.3.3 GPIB interface......................1221 12.3.4 Handler I/O (universal interface)................1224 12.4 Showroom mode.....................

  • Page 13: Safety And Regulatory Information

    ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Safety instructions 1 Safety and regulatory information The product documentation helps you use the product safely and efficiently. Follow the instructions provided here and in the following chapters. Intended use The product is intended for the development, production and verification of electronic components and devices in industrial, administrative, and laboratory environments.
  • Page 14 ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Safety instructions can use lifting or transporting equipment. Follow the instructions provided by the equip- ment manufacturer. Choosing the operating site Only use the product indoors. The product casing is not waterproof. Water that enters can electrically connect the casing with live parts, which can lead to electric shock, serious personal injury or death if you touch the casing.

  • Page 15: Warning Messages In The Documentation

    ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Warning messages in the documentation ● If you connect the product to an external power supply, use the one delivered with the product or recommended in the product documentation. The external power supply must conform to the country-specific regulations. ●...

  • Page 16: Korea Certification Class A

    ® Safety and regulatory information R&S Korea certification class A 1.3 Korea certification class A 이 기기는 업무용(A급) 전자파 적합기기로서 판매자 또는 사용자는 이 점을 주의하시기 바라며, 가정외의 지역에서 사용하는 것을 목적으로 합니다. User Manual 1173.9557.02 ─ 63...

  • Page 17: Welcome To The R&S Znd

    ® Welcome to the R&S ZND R&S What's new in firmware version 3.50 2 Welcome to the R&S ZND This manual is intended to provide you with all information that is necessary for setup, manual and remote control of the R&S ZND. We also invite you to find out what's new in the current revision of the software and learn how to make best use of our documentation and of the help system.
  • Page 18 ® Welcome to the R&S ZND R&S What's new in firmware version 3.50 ● Additional commands for cal validation: – CALCulate:CALValidate:AVERage[:STATe] – CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:IMAGinary:LOWer|UPPer – CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:REAL:LOWer|UPPer – CALCulate:CALValidate:RUN:RESult? ● Deembedding assistant (R&S ZND-K220 | R&S ZND-K230 | R&S ZND-K210): New command to check for suc- CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:RUN:RESult? cessful deembedding tool execution...

  • Page 19: Documentation Overview

    ® Welcome to the R&S ZND R&S Documentation overview ● If measurement data was available for some calibration standards, and the related setup was saved under a different name, then "Repeat Calibration" failed in the resulting recall set. ● Changing the smoothing aperture did not take effect immediately ●...

  • Page 20: Service Manual

    ® Welcome to the R&S ZND R&S Documentation overview The user manual is also available for download or for immediate display on the Inter- net. 2.2.3 Service manual Describes the performance test for checking the rated specifications, module replace- ment and repair, firmware update, troubleshooting and fault elimination, and contains mechanical drawings and spare part lists.

  • Page 21: Application Notes, Application Cards, White Papers, Etc

    ® Welcome to the R&S ZND R&S Documentation overview 2.2.8 Application notes, application cards, white papers, etc. These documents deal with special applications or background information on particu- lar topics. https://www.rohde-schwarz.com/brochure-datasheet/ZND User Manual 1173.9557.02 ─ 63...

  • Page 22: Getting Started

    ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use 3 Getting started Note: the following chapters are identical to those in the printed R&S ZND Getting Started manual. ● Preparing for use.....................22 ● Instrument tour......................32 ● Operating the instrument..................39 ● Performing measurements..................64 3.1 Preparing for use Here, you can find basic information about setting up the product for the first time.

  • Page 23: Setting Up The Product

    ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use Electromagnetic compatibility classes The electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) class indicates where you can operate the product. The EMC class of the product is given in the data sheet. ● Class B equipment is suitable for use in: –...
  • Page 24 ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use Left = Stacked correctly, same dimensions Middle = Stacked correctly, different dimensions Right = Stacked incorrectly, too many products 4. NOTICE! Overheating can damage the product. Prevent overheating as follows: ● Keep a minimum distance of 10 cm between the fan openings of the product and any object in the vicinity to provide sufficient airflow and ventilation.

  • Page 25: Considerations For Test Setup

    ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use 2. Remove the R&S ZND from the rack. 3. If placing the R&S ZND on a bench top again, unmount the adapter kit from the R&S ZND. Follow the instructions provided with the adapter kit. 3.1.5 Considerations for test setup Cable selection and electromagnetic interference (EMI) Electromagnetic interference (EMI) can affect the measurement results.

  • Page 26: Connecting The Analyzer To The Ac Supply

    ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use During operation, if the firmware observes a serious unexpected disturbance (e.g. due to ESD), it resets all hardware components to ensure proper instrument functioning. It then restores the user settings to the state before the disturbance and indicates the foregone hardware reset by an "Hardware communication problem [...]"...

  • Page 27: Standby And Ready State

    ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use To shut down the instrument 1. Press the standby toggle key. Pressing the standby toggle key causes the instrument to save all loaded recall sets, to close the VNA application, to shut down Windows ®...
  • Page 28 ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use Modifications of the operating system The operating system is adapted to the network analyzer. To avoid impairment of instrument functions, only change the settings described in this manual. Existing soft- ware must be modified only with update software released by Rohde & Schwarz. Like- wise, only programs authorized by Rohde &...

  • Page 29: Minimizing The Vna Application

    ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use ment. Rohde & Schwarz does NOT recommend running anti-virus software in the background ("on-access" mode) on Windows-based instruments, due to potentially degrading instrument performance. However, Rohde & Schwarz does recommend run- ning it during non-critical hours. For details and recommendations, see the following Rohde &...

  • Page 30: Connecting External Accessories

    ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use 3.1.11 Connecting external accessories The analyzer's standard PC interfaces (Monitor, USB, LAN) can be used to connect various accessories: ● ® An external monitor expands/displays the Windows desktop, which is, by default, covered by the vector network analyzer (VNA) (VNA) application window in full- screen mode.
  • Page 31 ® Getting started R&S Preparing for use 3.1.11.3 Connecting a mouse A USB mouse can be connected to any of the USB connectors. After being auto-detec- ted by the operating system, it can safely be disconnected and reconnected even dur- ing measurements.

  • Page 32: Instrument Tour

    ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour Printer configuration Use the "Printer Setup" dialog of the firmware (SYSTEM – [PRINT] > "Print...") or the ® Windows printer management to configure the printer properties and printing prefer- ences. 3.1.11.5 Connecting a LAN cable A LAN cable can be connected to the LAN connector on the rear panel of the analyzer.
  • Page 33 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour Figure 3-1: Front View of R&S ZND 3.2.1.1 Touchscreen The analyzer is equipped with a 12.1'' XGA color touchscreen. The touchscreen pres- ents all measurement results, mostly in the form of diagrams. Besides, all instrument functions can be accessed and operated by tapping the control elements on the touch- screen.
  • Page 34 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour Screen saver The screen saver function of the operating system can be used to switch off the display if the analyzer receives no command for a selectable period of time. The display is switched on again if any front panel key is pressed. ®...
  • Page 35 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour The SYSTEM keys provide general system settings. ● ® [FILE] provides standard Windows functions used to create, save, recall or print recall sets, to copy the active screen and to shut down the application. ●...
  • Page 36 ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour – Confirm selections and entries made and close dialogs (equivalent to the "OK" button). – Compress or expand menus or the Help table of contents ● BACKSPACE deletes the last character before the cursor position or the selected character sequence or numeric value.
  • Page 37 However, to use port 2 of a R&S ZND as driving port, you need one of the "bidirec- tional measurements" options: – R&S ZND-K5, for a R&S ZND without "extended frequency range" option R&S ZND-K1 – R&S ZND-K6, for a R&S ZND with "extended frequency range" option R&S ZND-K1 ●...

  • Page 38: Rear Panel

    ® Getting started R&S Instrument tour 3.2.2 Rear panel This section gives an overview of the rear panel controls and connectors of the net- work analyzer. Figure 3-2: Rear Panel R&S ZND The following connectors are available on all instruments: ●...

  • Page 39: Operating The Instrument

    ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument ● The ground connector in the lower left corner of the rear panel provides the ground of the analyzer's supply voltage. Use this connector for ESD protection; see "Pre- venting electrostatic discharge (ESD)" on page 25.
  • Page 40 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Figure 3-3: Function Keys Customizing the screen The contents of the screen and the size and position of many display and control ele- ments are not fixed. You can display or hide most elements. You can also drag and drop traces, info fields, and even the softtool panel to your preferred position;...
  • Page 41 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument left = unidirectional R&S ZND right = bidirectional R&S ZND 2. Activate the desired softtool tab, e.g. "Z←Sij". left = unidirectional R&S ZND right = bidirectional R&S ZND 3. Select a control element, e.g. "Z←S11". The diagram immediately reflects your selection.
  • Page 42 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Using the menu bar The menu bar at the bottom of the application screen provides alternative access to all instrument functions. To repeat the measured quantity selection described above, ► Select TRACE – [MEAS] > "Z←Sij" > "Z←S11". The diagram immediately reflects your selection.
  • Page 43 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument left = unidirectional R&S ZND right = bidirectional R&S ZND 2. Select "S-Parameter" to open the "Meas" > "S-Params" softtool tab. left = unidirectional R&S ZND right = bidirectional R&S ZND 3. Select "Z←Sij" > "Z←S11". User Manual 1173.9557.02 ─...

  • Page 44: Control Elements Of The Application Window

    ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument left = unidirectional R&S ZND right = bidirectional R&S ZND 3.3.2 Control elements of the application window The application window of the analyzer provides all control elements for the measure- ments and contains the diagrams for the results. There are several alternative ways for accessing an instrument function: ●...
  • Page 45 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument These methods are described in more detail in the following sections. For further reference: ● Refer to Chapter 4.2.1, "Display elements of a diagram", on page 85 to obtain information about the results in the diagram. ●...
  • Page 46 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument The toolbar is divided into several icon groups, separated by vertical lines. These icons represent the undo and redo actions that are also available via the menu bar items "System" > "Undo" / "Redo". Undo reverses the last action, redo reverses the last undo action (if possi- ble).
  • Page 47 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Figure 3-4: Scale softtool A softtool consists of a title area with a close/re-open icon and a tabbed panel below it. The title area remains displayed when the softtool is closed, which allows you to reopen a closed softtool at any time.
  • Page 48 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument ● The "Display" menu provides all display settings and the functions for activating, modifying and arranging different diagrams. ● The "Application" menu gives access to applications and tools that extend the func- tionality of the analyzer firmware. ●...
  • Page 49 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 3.3.2.6 Hardkey panel The (virtual) "Hard Key" panel provides on-screen access to the function keys (plus the [UNDO] and [REDO] key) of the R&S ZND. Most of the function keys open a related softtool.

  • Page 50: Working With Dialogs

    ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument ● the "EXT REF" symbol, if an external reference clock is used for synchronization (see "Ext Frequency" on page 578) ● the switch matrix status symbol, if a switch matrix is configured (See Chapter 4.7.20, "External switch matrices", on page 220)

  • Page 51: Handling Diagrams, Traces, And Markers

    ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument – Use the "Dialog Transparency" function to make the display elements behind the dialog visible. Note: The "Dialog Transparency" is a global setting, i.e. it applies to all dialogs. – Use the icon to create a screenshot of the dialog. ●...
  • Page 52 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 2. Select the adequate drop position, depending on whether you want to display the new trace in the existing diagram, or whether you want to add a new diagram. The highlighted area indicates the target diagram. 3.
  • Page 53 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Alternative control elements To measure a different quantity, select TRACE – [MEAS]. Drag and drop a softkey rep- resenting a measured quantity to create a trace. Or simply select another softkey to change the measured quantity of the active trace. Select TRACE –...
  • Page 54 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 3.3.4.3 Deleting display elements Markers, traces, diagrams, and other display elements are most conveniently deleted using the "Delete" icon in the toolbar above the diagram area. ● To delete a single marker, drag it into vertical direction to release it from the trace and drop it onto the "Delete"...

  • Page 55: Entering Data

    ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Screen element Action Drag and drop... Reset / suspend "Zoom" element in additional trace line --> "Delete" icon; see Chapter 3.3.6.1, graphic zoom "Using the graphical zoom", on page 58 Marker Create Chapter 3.3.4.2, "Adding new markers", on page 53 Move horizontally...
  • Page 56 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument ● Use [-] to change the sign of the value. ● (-)9 Use [G/n], [M/μ], [k/m], or [x1] to multiply the entered value with factors of 10 (-)6 , 10 (-)3 or 1 and to add the appropriate physical unit. To enter a character string: 1.
  • Page 57 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 3. If desired, select a "Step Size" and use the cursor up/down buttons to increment/ decrement the current value. If a marker is active, you can also set the numeric value to the current marker value ("Set to Marker"). 4.

  • Page 58: Scaling Diagrams

    ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Figure 3-6: Windows 10 on-screen keyboard To call up the on-screen keyboard: 1. Open the SYSTEM – [APPLIC] softtool. 2. In the "External Tools" tab, select "Screen Keyboard". 3.3.6 Scaling diagrams The analyzer provides various tools for customizing the diagrams and for setting the sweep range.
  • Page 59 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument The icon changes its background color from black to blue. ● In the active diagram area, select an appropriate rectangular area. The zoomed view shows the selected rectangle, scaled in both horizontal and verti- cal direction.
  • Page 60 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument Alternative settings ● The TRACE – [SCALE] > "Zoom" softtool tab allows you to define the displayed zoom range numerically. It can also be opened from the menu of the "Zoom Config" toolbar icon. ●...
  • Page 61 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument ● Tap and hold (with a mouse: right-click) the "Start" or "Stop" label in the channel list and select "Start Frequency", "Stop Frequency", "Center Frequency", or "Fre- quency Span" from the context menu. ●...
  • Page 62 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 3.3.6.5 Circular diagrams The radial scale of a circular diagram ("Polar", "Smith" or "Inverted Smith") can be changed with a single linear parameter, the "Ref Value". The reference value defines the radius of the outer circumference. ●...
  • Page 63 ® Getting started R&S Operating the instrument 2. Place "M1" to the start value of the desired sweep range and tap TRACE – [MARKER] > "Set by Marker" > "Start = Marker". 3. Place "M2" to the stop value of the desired sweep range and tap TRACE – [MARKER] >...

  • Page 64: Performing Measurements

    ® Getting started R&S Performing measurements 3.4 Performing measurements This chapter takes you through a sample session with a R&S ZND network analyzer and describes basic operation tasks. Prerequisite The instrument is set up, connected to the mains system, and started up as described Chapter 3.1, "Preparing for use", on page 22.
  • Page 65 ® Getting started R&S Performing measurements 1. Connect the DUT between test ports 1 and 2 of the network analyzer as shown above. 2. Use the [PRESET] key to restore a well-defined instrument state. The analyzer is now set to its default state. The default measured quantity is the transmission S-parameter S Select TRACE –...
  • Page 66 ® Getting started R&S Performing measurements 2. The stimulus signal from the analyzer port no. 2 is not needed except for some cali- bration types. By default the sweep range is set to the frequency range of the analyzer, which can be unsuitable for your DUT.
  • Page 67 ® Getting started R&S Performing measurements Due to the R&S ZND's calibration wizard, calibration is a straightforward, guided proc- ess. 1. Replace the DUT by the Through standard of your calibration kit. Make sure to dis- connect all calibration units. 2.
  • Page 68 ® Getting started R&S Performing measurements 6. Tap"Start". 7. The calibration dock widget indicates the standard measurements that make up a "Trans Norm" calibration. Select "Through (mm)" to initiate the measurement of the connected Through stan- dard. Measuring the isolation between ports 1 and 2 is optional. Skip it for now. User Manual 1173.9557.02 ─...
  • Page 69 ® Getting started R&S Performing measurements The analyzer performs a calibration sweep for the measured quantity S . The magnitude and phase of the result is displayed in two diagrams, together with the expected typical result for a Through standard. The similarity of real and expected traces indicates that the Through standard has been properly connected.
  • Page 70 ® Getting started R&S Performing measurements The group delay represents the propagation time of the wave through the DUT; it is displayed in a Cartesian diagram. The marker info field shows the frequency and group delay at the marker position. Refer to Chapter 4.2.3, "Trace formats",...

  • Page 71: Reflection S-Parameter Measurement

    ® Getting started R&S Performing measurements 7. In the "Save" dialog: a) Select a file location ("Look in:"). b) Enter a name for the recall set file ("File name:"). c) Select "Save". The analyzer saves the active recall set, containing channel, stimulus and trace settings, to a znx file.
  • Page 72 ® Getting started R&S Performing measurements ● Some of the trace formats are particularly suited for reflection measurements. For instance, you can display the measured reflection coefficient S in a Smith chart to obtain the complex input impedance at port 1. Proceed as described in Chapter 3.1.7, "Switching the instrument on and off",...

  • Page 73: Concepts And Features

    ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts 4 Concepts and features The following chapter provides an overview of the analyzer's capabilities and their use. It contains a description of the basic concepts that the analyzer uses to organize, proc- ess and display measurement data. Also included are descriptions of the screen con- tents, possible measured quantities, calibration methods and typical test setups.

  • Page 74: Recall Sets

    ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts ● Calibration pool: system error correction and power correction data ● Directories for trace data, limit lines, calibration data etc. ● Color schemes and printer settings ● System configurations, to be accessed via SYSTEM – [SETUP]. ●...
  • Page 75 ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts 4.1.3.1 Trace settings The trace settings specify the mathematical operations used to obtain traces from the measured or stored data. They can be divided into several main groups: ● Selection of the measured quantity (S-parameters, wave quantities, ratios, impe- dances,...) ●...

  • Page 76: Sweep Control

    ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts 4.1.3.3 Active and inactive traces and channels A window can display several diagrams simultaneously, each with a variable number of traces. One of these traces is active at each time. The active trace is highlighted in the trace list on top of the active diagram (Trc4 in the figure below): When a trace is selected in the diagram area, it becomes the active trace.
  • Page 77 ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts After changing the channel settings or selecting another measured quantity, the ana- lyzer needs some time to initialize the new sweep. This preparation period increases with the number of points and the number of partial measurements involved. It indica- ted in the status bar: All analyzer settings can still be changed during sweep initialization.
  • Page 78 ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts Use the "Alternated" mode to increase the accuracy of measurements on DUTs with long level settling times (e.g. quartzes, SAW filters). To measure DUTs with short set- tling times and obtain a trace from the beginning of the sweep, use "Chopped" mode. In "Auto"...
  • Page 79 To use port 2 of a R&S ZND as driving port, you need one of the "bidirectional mea- surements" options R&S ZND-K5 (for a R&S ZND without the "extended frequency range" option R&S ZND-K1) or R&S ZND-K6 (for a R&S ZND with R&S ZND-K1). User Manual 1173.9557.02 ─ 63...
  • Page 80 Basic concepts R&S ZND-K5 max frequency 4.5 GHz max frequency 4.5 GHz bidirectional P1↔P2 unidirectional P1→P2 R&S R&S ZND-K1 ZND-K8 R&S ZND-K6 max frequency 8.5 GHz max frequency 8.5 GHz bidirectional P1↔P2 unidirectional P1→P2 With unidirectional operation, the following restrictions apply: ●...

  • Page 81: Data Flow

    ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts – For "Segmented" sweeps, the start and stop frequency in a sweep segment must not be different. So with a segmented sweep you can measure n points at frequency f (in segment 1), n points at frequency f (in segment 2) etc.
  • Page 82 ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts RAW WAVE Channel data flow QUANTITIES for all traces of the channel SYSTEM ERROR CORRECTION (Factory) SYSTEM POWER POWER SYST. ERR. ERROR CORRECTION CORRECTION CORRECTION CORRECTION DATA (User) DATA (User) S-parameters Wave quantities with wave de-/embedding Wave quantities without DEEMBEDDING...
  • Page 83 ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts calibration on the measured wave quantities, intermediate results were transformed to the S-parameter domain. Before each de-/embedding step, the S-parameters were transformed to conductance (~ wave quantities), and vice versa afterwards. The new "wave de-/embedding" remains in the wave quantity (~conductance) domain and calculates all de-/embedding steps in one multiplication step, without unnecessary matrix inversions.
  • Page 84 ® Concepts and features R&S Basic concepts Channel data flow for all traces AVERAGE of the channel Trace 1 Mem 1,1 Mem 1,2 Trace 2 Mem 2,1 Mem 2,2 Unformatted Trace data flow TRACE MATH for individual traces SHIFT RESPONSE TIME DOMAIN GATE *...

  • Page 85: Screen Elements

    ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements 4.2 Screen elements This section describes manual operation of the analyzer, including trace settings, mark- ers and diagrams. For a description of the different quantities measured by the instru- ment, refer to Chapter 4.3, "Measurement results", on page 107.
  • Page 86 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements 4.2.1.1 Title An optional title across the top of the diagram can be used for a brief description of the diagram contents. Select SYSTEM – [DISPLAY] > "Diagram" > "Title" to enter the diagram title and "Show Title"...
  • Page 87 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements The type of each trace in a diagram is indicated in the trace list: "MEM<no>" at the beginning of the trace name indicates a memory trace (with default naming), Math at the end of the trace label indicates a mathematical trace. You can also hide a trace ("Invisible") without deleting it.
  • Page 88 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements Example: The following context menu is assigned to the measured quantity section in the trace list: A label "Cal Off" appears at the end of the trace line if the system error correction no longer applies to the trace.
  • Page 89 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements The most common tasks to be performed with markers can be achieved using the "Marker" menu functions: ● Determine the coordinates of a measurement point on the trace. In polar diagrams where no x-axis is displayed, markers can be used to retrieve the stimulus value of specific points.
  • Page 90 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements markers assigned to a trace are independent of each other and of the trace format settings. ● The active marker has a dot placed in front of the marker line. ● "R" denotes the reference marker. A "Δ" sign placed in front of the marker line indi- cates that the marker is in delta mode.
  • Page 91 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements trace (the raw measurement data) and the respective target format. This must be kept in mind when interpreting the results and physical units displayed. The following table describes how a complex marker value z = x + jy is converted. It makes use of the polar representation z = x + jy = |z| e jφ(z) , where...
  • Page 92 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements Marker Format Description Formula Imp Mag Magnitude of (series) impedance | = (R IMP Mag series***) Imp Mag paral- Magnitude of parallel impedance | = (R lel***) Adm Mag Magnitude of (series) admittance | = (G Adm Mag series***) Adm Mag paral-...
  • Page 93 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements Only one kind of marker coupling can be enabled. For instance, it is not possible to couple markers per channel and per diagram at the same time. Basic marker search functions The search functions are tools for searching measurement data according to specific criteria.
  • Page 94 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements The info field contains the following search results: ● "Bandwidth" is the n-dB bandwidth of the bandpass/bandstop region, where n is a selectable bandwidth factor. The bandwidth is equal to the difference between the lower and the upper band edge frequency.
  • Page 95 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements Each line in the channel list describes a single channel. The channel of the active trace is highlighted. The lines are divided into several sections with the following contents (from left to right): ●...

  • Page 96: Dialogs

    ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements ● Channel list (separate context menus for channel name section, sweep range sec- tion, additional parameter section) To open a context menu associated with a display element, tap and hold the element for some seconds. Right-click the display element if you are using a mouse. Example: The following context menu is assigned to the channel name section in the channel list: The functions of the context menu can also be called using the menu bar or the related...
  • Page 97 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements numeric value is incremented or decremented, or when display elements are added or removed. In most dialogs, however, it is possible to cancel an erroneous input before it takes effect. The settings in such dialogs must be confirmed explicitly. The two types of dialogs are easy to distinguish: ●...
  • Page 98 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements ● "Windows Explorer" opens the selected directory in the Windows Explorer. ● "File name" specifies a filename to save the current data. The analyzer adds the extension in the "Files of type" field. ●...

  • Page 99: Trace Formats

    ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements Figure 4-4: Multi-channel setup dialog The channel selector in the title bar and the channel-related buttons in the lower part of the dialog ("Copy to New Channel", "Copy to New Ch + Diagram" allow you to select the target channels.
  • Page 100 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements ● The x-axis scaling depends on the sweep type of the channel to which the trace is assigned: – For sweep types "Lin Freq", "Power", "CW Mode" and "Time" it is scaled line- arly.
  • Page 101 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements An extended range of formats and conversion formulas is available for markers. To convert any point on a trace, create a marker and select the appropriate marker format. Marker and trace formats can be selected independently. 4.2.3.2 Complex trace formats Complex trace formats assign a complex response to the stimulus value (frequency,...
  • Page 102 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements Example: Reflection coefficients in polar diagrams If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient (S etc.), then the cen- ter of the polar diagram corresponds to a perfect load Z at the input test port of the DUT (no reflection, matched input).
  • Page 103 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements ● Points with the same reactance produce arcs. The following example shows a Smith chart with a marker used to display the stimulus value, the complex impedance Z = R + j X and the equivalent inductance L. Smith chart construction In a Smith chart, the impedance plane is reshaped so that the area with positive resist- ance is mapped into a unit circle.
  • Page 104 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements dinates in the normalized impedance plane and in the reflection coefficient plane are related as follows (see also: definition of matched-circuit (converted) impedances): From this equation, it is easy to relate the real and imaginary components of the com- plex resistance to the real and imaginary parts of Γ: According to the two equations above, the graphical representation in a Smith chart has the following properties:...
  • Page 105 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements In a diagram, the grid lines overlaid to a "Smith" trace correspond to points of equal conductance G and susceptance B: ● Points with the same conductance are located on circles. ● Points with the same susceptance produce arcs. The following example shows an inverted Smith chart with a marker used to display the stimulus value, the complex admittance Y = G + j B and the equivalent inductance L.
  • Page 106 ® Concepts and features R&S Screen elements ● The upper and lower half of the diagram correspond to negative (inductive) and positive (capacitive) susceptive components of the admittance, respectively. Example: Reflection coefficients in the inverted Smith chart If the measured quantity is a complex reflection coefficient Γ (e.g. S ), then the inverted Smith chart can be used to read the normalized admittance of the DUT.

  • Page 107: Measurement Results

    ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results 4.2.3.3 Measured quantities and trace formats The analyzer allows any combination of a display format and a measured quantity. The following rules can help to avoid inappropriate formats and find the format that is ide- ally suited to the measurement task.

  • Page 108: S-Parameters

    ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results 4.3.1 S-parameters S-parameters are the basic measured quantities of a network analyzer. They describe how the DUT modifies a signal that is transmitted or reflected in forward or reverse direction. For a 2-port measurement, the signal flow is as follows. The figure above is sufficient for the definition of S-parameters but does not necessa- rily show the complete signal flow.

  • Page 109: Reference Impedances

    ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results Meaning of squared amplitudes The squared amplitudes of the incident and outgoing waves and of the matrix elements have a simple meaning: Table 4-3: Squared S-parameters Available incident power (= the power provided by a generator with a source impedance equal to the reference impedance Z ) at DUT port i=1,2...
  • Page 110 ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results The default values for the balanced port reference impedances are derived from the default reference impedance of the physical analyzer ports (Z = 50 Ω): ● The default value for the differential mode is Z = 100 Ω...

  • Page 111: Impedance Parameters

    ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results                                The renormalized S-matrix S1 is calculated as: ...
  • Page 112 ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results Example: For a 2-port DUT that is terminated at its output with the reference impedance Z is the input impedance (matched-circuit impedance measured in a forward reflection measurement). A converted impedance Z completely describes a one-port DUT. The calculation formula of the converted reflection impedances Z depends on the waveguide circuit theory according to which...
  • Page 113 ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results Table 4-5: Calculation of Converted Series Transmission Impedances Traveling Waves Power Waves Parallel transmission impedance A two-port transmission parameter Z (i ≠ j) can also describe a parallel impedance between the two ports. The calculation formula of a converted parallel transmission impedance Z depends on the waveguide circuit theory according to which...
  • Page 114 ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results 4.3.3.2 Z-parameters The Z-parameters describe the impedances of a DUT with open output ports (impe- dance = 0). The analyzer provides the full set of Z-parameters including the transfer impedances (i.e. the complete nxn Z-matrix for an n port DUT). This means that Z-parameters can be used as an alternative to S-parameters (or Y- parameters) to characterize a linear n-port network completely.

  • Page 115: Admittance Parameters

    ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results ● is the output impedance, defined as the ratio of the voltage V to the current I measured at port 2 (reverse measurement with open input, I = 0). Z-parameters can be easily extended to describe circuits with more than two ports or several modes of propagation.

  • Page 116: Wave Quantities And Ratios

    ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results ● is the forward transfer admittance, defined as the ratio of the current I to the voltage V (forward measurement with output terminated in a short circuit, V = 0). ● is the reverse transfer admittance, defined as the ratio of the current I to the voltage V (reverse measurement with input terminated in a short circuit, V...
  • Page 117 ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results Examples for using wave quantities The wave quantities provide the power at the different receive ports of the analyzer. This is different from an S-parameter measurement, where the absolute power of a lin- ear device is canceled.
  • Page 118 ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results Examples for using ratios A measurement of ratios is particularly suitable for the following test scenarios: ● The test setup or some of its components (e.g. active components or non-recipro- cal devices) do not allow a system error correction so that a complete S-parameter measurement is not possible.

  • Page 119: Unbalance-Balance Conversion

    ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results The following detectors are available: ● "Normal" selects the default detector mode where each valid measurement point is displayed without modification. The analyzer then proceeds to the next sweep point. Normal detector mode ensures that the measurement is performed at maxi- mum speed and that a meaningful complex result is obtained.
  • Page 120 ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results Internal balance- unbalance conversion Logical Physical VNA ports VNA ports Common Differential mode mode Balanced port Physical transformer (balun) Unbalance-balance conversion avoids the disadvantages of real transformers: ● There is no need to fabricate test fixtures with integrated baluns for each type of DUT.
  • Page 121 ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results Example: 2 physical ports: Reflection measurements on 1 balanced port Balanced port: Differential mode Log. Bal. port port Common mode 3 physical ports: Reflection and transmission measurements on 1 balanced port Single-ended Balanced port: (unbalanced) port Differential mode Single...
  • Page 122 ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results Mixed mode parameters are used to distinguish the following three port modes: ● s: Single-ended (for unbalanced ports) ● d: Differential mode (for balanced ports) ● c: Common mode (for balanced ports) The notation of a general S-parameter is S , where <mout>...
  • Page 123 ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results 2. DUT with one balanced port: Only reflection and mode conversion measurements with differential and common mode parameters. 3. DUT with one balanced and one single-ended port. 4. DUT with two balanced ports or one balanced and two single-ended ports. Both device types are fully characterized by 4x4 mixed mode S-matrices.

  • Page 124: Stability Factors

    ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results General Definition In general, imbalance and CMRR are quantities with two numeric indices, indicating the logical output port and the logical input port of the DUT during the measurement (Imb , CMRR <out><in> <out><in>...

  • Page 125: Group Delay

    ® Concepts and features R&S Measurement results                     where denotes the complex conjugate of S. Stability factors are calculated as functions of the frequency or another stimulus parameter.

  • Page 126: Operations On Traces

    ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces In practice, the analyzer calculates an approximation to the derivative of the phase response, taking a small frequency interval Δf and determining the corresponding phase change ΔΦ. The group delay is computed as ...
  • Page 127 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces ● A lower limit line defines the minimum allowed values for the related stimulus range. ● A ripple limit defines the maximum difference between the largest and the smallest response value for the related stimulus range. A ripple limit test is suitable, e.g., to check whether the passband ripple of a filter is within acceptable limits, irrespective of the actual transmitted power in the passband.
  • Page 128 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces As a consequence of the limit line rules, a DUT always passes the limit check if no limit lines are defined. Formula-defined limit lines A limit line doesn't have to be straight. You can also use a custom formula to define it. When the sweep axis is changed from linear frequency sweep to logarithmic sweeps, straight limit lines are transformed into exponential curves.
  • Page 129 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces While "Show Limit Line" is active, the diagrams display all limit line segments. Exception: In a segmented frequency sweep with point-based x-axis, gaps between the segments are minimized. To facilitate the interpretation, the R&S ZND displays only the limit line segments which provide the limit check criterion (the "tighter"...
  • Page 130 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces The limit line rules for logarithmic sweeps and segmented frequency sweeps with point-based x-axis also apply to ripple limit lines (see Chapter 4.4.1.1, "Rules for limit line definition", on page 127). 4.4.1.3 Circle limits A circle limit is a special type of upper limit line which is defined by its center coordi- nate in the diagram and its radius.
  • Page 131 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces ● With a circle limit line adjusted to the right border of a Smith diagram (Z = infinity), you can check whether the imaginary part of the impedance (Im(Z), reactance) falls below a limit. User Manual 1173.9557.02 ─...
  • Page 132 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces ● With a circle limit line centered on the left border of an inverted Smith diagram (Y = infinity), you can check whether the imaginary part of the admittance (Im(Y), sus- ceptance) falls below a limit. User Manual 1173.9557.02 ─...
  • Page 133 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces 4.4.1.4 File format for limit lines The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export limit line data. By default, the limit line file has the extension *.limit and is stored in the directory shown in the "Save Limit Line"...

  • Page 134: Trace Files

    ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces Compatibility with other instruments The VNAs of the R&S ZNx and R&S ZVx families use the same file format. Limit line files can be interchanged without restriction. 4.4.1.5 File format for ripple limits The analyzer uses a simple ASCII format to export ripple limits.
  • Page 135 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces ● When exporting traces to a file, it is recommended to set the analyzer to single sweep mode (CHANNEL – [SWEEP] > "Sweep Control" > "All Channels on Hold"). This mode ensures that a complete sweep is exported. ●...
  • Page 136 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces # <frequency unit> <parameter> <data format> R <reference resistance> ● # indicates the beginning of the option line ● <frequency unit> can be either Hz, kHz, MHz or GHz. Default is GHz. The R&S ZND always uses HZ for exported data.
  • Page 137 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces Timestamp The timestamp comment line reflects the time at which the Touchstone file was cre- ated. For "Version 1.1 (ZNx)" export format, it is represented as Coordinated Universal Time (UTC): ! Created: UTC 12/24/2020, 5:20:26 PM The other export formats "Version 1.1"...
  • Page 138 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces ● "Version 1.1" and "Version 2.0" export formats These export formats always use single-ended identifiers Sij and port numbers 1 to n in the table header. ! freq[Hz] S11[Re] S11[Im] ... The mapping between nominal (single-ended) and actual – possibly balanced – ports is given in the port assignments comments.
  • Page 139 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces The purpose of the keywords is to give more details about the file contents in a stand- ardized way. During "Version 2.0" export, the R&S ZND writes the following keywords to the generated Touchstone file: Keyword Example Description...
  • Page 140 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces The following general rules apply: ● Individual entries in a network data line are separated by whitespace ● In version 1.1 files, no more than four parameters are allowed per network data line.
  • Page 141 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces 1.000000000000000e+09 -2.375070438098596e-01 -4.533104459856211e-01 1.010000000000000e+09 -3.132740349817996e-01 -5.874596585157938e-01 1.020000000000000e+09 -3.062444919836442e-01 -4.587379501906624e-01 Conditions for Touchstone file export ● One-port Touchstone files with data from a single trace Typically, Touchstone files contain a complete set of S-parameter traces of an n- port network.
  • Page 142 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces In this case, the reference impedances of the individual ports are used for the renormalization and these impedances are documented in the Renormalization information comment. If the port-specific reference impedances are different, an additional warning is added to this comment, indicating that the option line contains a non-matching reference resistance.

  • Page 143: Memory-Mapped Trace Data Transfer

    ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces The stimulus values are arranged in ascending order. 4.4.2.3 Finding the best file format The file format depends on how you want to use the exported data. Use a Touchstone file format to export S-parameter data traces to a file that can be evaluated with applications such as Keysight's Advanced Design System (the former Microwave Design System), and to convert mixed mode parameters back to single- ended parameters.
  • Page 144 ® Concepts and features R&S Operations on traces Set up a shared memory buffer The setup of a shared memory buffer and the allocation of trace data is performed by a sequence of SYSTem:DATA:MEMory... commands, starting with an INITialize and finished by a COMMit.

  • Page 145: Calibration

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration 4.5 Calibration Calibration or system error correction is the process of eliminating systematic, reprodu- cible errors from the measurement results (S-parameters and derived quantities; see Chapter 4.1.5, "Data flow", on page 81). The process involves the following stages: 1.

  • Page 146: Calibration Types

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Cal Off label A label "Cal Off" appears in the trace line if the system error correction no longer applies to the trace: This can happen for one of the following reasons: ● The sweep range is outside the calibrated frequency range. ●...
  • Page 147 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Calibration Type Standards Parameters Error Terms General Accuracy Application One Path Two Ports Open, Short, for fixed source Reflection tracking, Medium to high Unidirectional trans- mission measure- Match (at source port j and target Source match, ments in any direc- port),...
  • Page 148 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Calibration Type Standards Parameters Error Terms General Accuracy Application Through, Attenua- Reflection tracking, High, lowest Reflection and tion, Symmetric requirements on transmission mea- (2-port) Source match, network standards surements, espe- Directivity, cially for planar cir- cuits.

  • Page 149: Reflection Osm Calibration

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration ● Manual reflection normalizations offer Complementary Match standard measure- ments ● Manual transmission normalizations support Complementary isolation measure- ment (optional). Complementary Match standard measurements For reflection normalizations, the mandatory Open or Short measurements can be complemented by optional Match measurements.

  • Page 150: Tosm And Uosm Calibration

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration With a unidirectional R&S ZND (see Chapter 4.1.4.3, "R&S ZND: unidirectional vs. bidirectional operation", on page 79) only the forward direction (source port 1) is availa- ble. 4.5.1.4 TOSM and UOSM calibration TOSM A TOSM (Through – Open – Short – Match) calibration requires the same standards as the one path two ports calibration, however, all measurements are performed in the for- ward and reverse direction.

  • Page 151: Adapter Removal

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration After acquiring the calibration sweep data for the unknown through, the analyzer auto- matically determines its delay time/transmission phase. 4.5.1.5 Adapter removal Many DUTs use different connector types on their RF ports (e.g. port 1: N-type connec- tor, female;...

  • Page 152: Tom Calibration

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Figure 4-7: Adapter Removal vs. UOSM The obtained adapter characteristics are mathematically removed from the obtained error coefficients. Uncertainties arising from a non-ideal characterization of the unknown through almost cancel, whereas they add up in the UOSM technique. As a consequence, Adapter Removal will provide more accurate results.

  • Page 153: Trm Calibration

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration 4.5.1.8 TRM calibration A TRM (Through – Reflect – Match) calibration requires a low-reflection, low-loss Through standard with an electrical length that can be different from zero, a Reflect, and a Match. The magnitude of the reflection coefficient of the Reflect standard can be unknown but must be nonzero;...
  • Page 154 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration To shift the calibrated sweep range to smaller or larger frequencies, you can use a lon- ger or shorter Line. To extend the calibrated range, use one of the following methods: ● Perform TRL calibration with two or three different Line standards. With an appro- priate length of the Lines, the ratio for the start and stop frequency of the calibrated sweep range can increase to approx.

  • Page 155: Tna Calibration

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration ● The shorter Line can be used from a frequency f where its transmission phase short is equal to 20 deg. This frequency is equal to /[18*(l – l short short ● The border between the two frequency segments f is calculated as the geometric mean of f and f...

  • Page 156: Full N-Port Calibration With Reduced Number Of Through Connections

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration must be well matched on both sides and cause an attenuation different from 0 dB; the exact value of the transmission coefficient is not important. As with TRL, TNA calibration is especially useful for planar DUTs. If TNA is not practi- cable, TRL can be an alternative.

  • Page 157: Calibration Standards And Calibration Kits

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration possible through connections are measured by default. If you want to apply the "Reduced Through" logic also for each port assignment, you can activate it in the system configuration. 4.5.1.12 Complementary isolation measurement For each port pair in a manual transmission normalization or TOSM calibration, the Through measurement can be complemented by an isolation measurement.
  • Page 158 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration 4.5.2.1 Calibration standard types The following table gives an overview of the different standards and their circuit models (offset and load models). Table 4-8: Calibration standard types Standard Type Characteristics Ideal Standard Offset Model Load Model ∞...
  • Page 159 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration ● The loss is the energy loss along the transmission line due to the skin effect. For resistive lines and at RF frequencies, the loss is approximately proportional to the square root of the frequency. In Keysight mode, the offset loss is expressed in units of Ω/s at a frequency of 1 GHz.
  • Page 160 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration 4.5.2.2 Cal kit parameter types The analyzer uses three types of parameters to describe the calibration standards. The parameter type is the same for all standards in a kit and therefore appended to the kit name: ●...
  • Page 161 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration The following additional parameters are used: ● Characteristic impedance: Z (characteristic impedance of the connector type) ● Loss: 0 dB / sqrt(GHz) or (0 GΩ / s) in Keysight mode ● All inductance and capacitance parameters are set to zero. 4.5.2.3 Sliding Match standards The Sliding Match is a one-port standard consisting of an air line with a movable, low-...
  • Page 162 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration ● The Sliding Match results are used for frequencies above the Min Freq. In general, the Sliding Match provides better results than the Match within its specified fre- quency range. 4.5.2.4 Cal kit Files Calibration kit files can be used to store the parameters of a particular calibration kit, to reload the data and to exchange calibration kits from one network analyzer to another.

  • Page 163: Calibration Pool

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration The network analyzer expects the dot as a separator and displays an error message when a *.csv file with commas is loaded. Please install the VNA Cal Kit Manager ® V2.1 on an appropriate (e.g. English) Windows version to avoid trouble.

  • Page 164: Automatic Calibration

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration 4.5.5 Automatic calibration A calibration unit is an integrated solution for automatic system error correction of vec- tor network analyzers. Rohde & Schwarz offers a wide range of calibration units for dif- ferent frequency ranges and connector types. The connector types of the calibration unit should be selected according to the connector types of the DUT.
  • Page 165 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration 4.5.5.1 Connecting the calibration unit The calibration units provide the following connectors: ● USB type B connector at the rear, which is used to power-supply and control the unit. A USB cable for connection to the network analyzer is provided with the cali- bration unit.
  • Page 166 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration 4.5.5.2 Performing an automatic calibration After connection and initialization of the calibration unit, perform the automatic calibra- tion of the related test ports using the "Calibration Unit" wizard (CHANNEL – [CAL] > "Start Cal" > "Start... (Cal Unit)"; see Chapter 5.11.1.3, "Calibration Unit wizard", on page 390).
  • Page 167 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration ● A one path two port calibration. The node port is the source port for the one path two port calibration (fully calibrated port). ● A transmission normalization (bidirectional, forward or reverse). "Forward" trans- mission normalization means that the signal direction is from port 1 to port 2.
  • Page 168 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration 4.5.5.4 Inline calibration Any disturbance of the measurement setup after the calibration process inevitably pro- duces errors. If a massive system error correction is required, e.g. if long RF cables with high damping are used, those disturbances can lead to inaccurate and unreprodu- cible measurement results.
  • Page 169 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Figure 4-10: ICC R&S ZN-Z30 For more information, see the R&S ZN-Z3x product pages at https://www.rohde- schwarz.com/product/NetworkAnalyzer_Acc_ZNZ3. Firmware integration The control connection between R&S ZND and ICC is established via USB. After the VNA firmware has detected the ICC, it requests information about connected ICUs from the ICC.
  • Page 170 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Because the ICC does not support hot plugging of ICUs, connect the ICUs to the ICC before connecting the ICC to the R&S ZND. The VNA firmware supports: ● Pulling characterization data for the connected ICUs from the ICC ●...
  • Page 171 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Step 1: OSM g) Step 2: Unknown Through 5. Connect the DUT to the calibrated setup and perform the required measurements. 6. Refresh the calibration in situ, whenever required. a) "Repeat" the calibration b) Perform OSM measurements. c) Skip Through measurements.
  • Page 172 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Basic mode When "Cal Validation" is launched for the first time, it runs in basic mode. In this mode, the R&S ZND automatically detects the instrument ports connected to the cal unit, and only validates connected ports. Thus, if a 2-port cal unit is connected to a 4-port cali- brated channel, only the two connected instrument ports are validated against the cal unit.
  • Page 173 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration For a channel with more calibrated ports than cal unit ports available, you can change the port assignments and rerun the automated validation. Or you can switch to advanced mode and validate each port manually. Advanced mode In advanced mode you can configure the validation settings (reference characteriza- tion, deviation limits) and run or rerun particular measurements (reflection at port p with...
  • Page 174 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration The multiple port assignment method considerably extends the range of applications of the calibration units. However, the method entails some loss of convenience because you have to reconnect the calibration unit between the different calibration stages (assignments).
  • Page 175 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration the accuracy of the calculated Throughs. Additional port assignments can improve the accuracy, if they add more measured through connections. For full n-port calibrations, an extra assignment is required if: ● An external switch matrix is used ●...

  • Page 176: Scalar Power Calibration

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Test Port Assignment 1 Assignment 2 Assignment 3 Cal Unit Port 1 Cal Unit Port 2 4.5.6 Scalar power calibration The purpose of a scalar power calibration is to ensure accurate source power levels and power readings at a particular position (calibration plane) in the test setup.
  • Page 177 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration duce an arbitrary attenuation or gain into the signal path so that the cal power is not restricted to the power range of the source. A typical application for a power calibration in a frequency sweep is the measurement of the gain of an amplifier across a fre- quency range but at a fixed input power.
  • Page 178 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration sweep range, the analyzer interpolates or extrapolates the calibration data; see Chap- ter 4.5.6.3, "Power calibration labels", on page 179. 4.5.6.2 Measurement receiver calibration A measurement receiver calibration ensures that the power readings at a specified receive port of the analyzer (b-waves) agree with the source power level calibrated at an arbitrary calibration plane.
  • Page 179 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration 4.5.6.3 Power calibration labels Power calibration labels in the trace list for wave quantities and ratios inform you about the status and type of the current scalar power calibration. The labels appear in the fol- lowing instances: ●...
  • Page 180 ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration ● At new sweep points outside the calibrated sweep range, the correction values are extrapolated: Sweep points below the lowest calibrated frequency are assigned the correction value of the lowest frequency. Sweep points above the highest calibra- ted frequency are assigned the correction value of the highest frequency.

  • Page 181: Parallel Calibration Of Multiple Channels

    ® Concepts and features R&S Calibration Practical example: An adapter or attenuator with known attenuation is needed to con- nect the power sensor to the test port of the network analyzer. The transmission coeffi- cients of the adapter are used for the power meter correction. 4.5.7 Parallel calibration of multiple channels If multiple channels are configured in the active recall set, clearly they can be calibra- ted one after the other, but this can be inefficient in terms of necessary reconnections...

  • Page 182: Offset Parameters And De-/Embedding

    ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding 4.6 Offset parameters and de-/embedding The R&S ZND functionality described in this section complements the calibration, com- pensating for the effect of known transmission lines or matching networks between the calibrated reference plane and the DUT. 4.6.1 Offset parameters Offset parameters compensate for the known length and loss of a (non-dispersive and perfectly matched) transmission line between the calibrated reference plane and the...
  • Page 183 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding In the limit case, where the length of the transmission line is considered to be "almost zero", the loss is considered constant: Otherwise, if the loss at DC and one additional frequency f is known (or measured), the loss at frequency f is approximated by: If in addition the loss at a second frequency f...
  • Page 184 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding This yields the delay for propagation in forward and reverse direction and should be approx. twice the "Auto Length" result. For transmission measurements, both results should be approx. equal. 2. Measure the reflection factor and select TRACE – [FORMAT] > "Phase". Place a marker to the trace and activate TRACE –...
  • Page 185 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding "Auto Length and Loss" involves a two-step procedure: ● An "Auto Length" correction modifies the phase of the measured quantity, minimiz- ing the residual group delay. The magnitude of the measured quantity is not affec- ted.
  • Page 186 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding 4.6.1.5 Fixture Compensation "Fixture Compensation" is an automated length offset and loss compensation for test fixtures. The analyzer performs a one-port reflection measurement at each port, assuming the inner contacts of the test fixtures to be terminated with an open or short circuit.
  • Page 187 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding fixture compensation sweeps to compensate for the inaccuracies of the individual "Open and Short" compensations. 4.6.1.6 Application and effect of offset parameters Offset and loss parameters can be particularly useful if the reference plane of the cali- bration cannot be placed directly at the DUT ports, e.g.

  • Page 188: Embedding And Deembedding

    ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding ● "Auto Length" corrects the length offset of both physical ports of a logical port by the same amount. 4.6.2 Embedding and deembedding The R&S ZND allows you to define virtual networks to be added to/removed from the measurement circuit for a DUT with single ended or balanced ports.
  • Page 189 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding Single-ended Balanced port port Balun Matching circuit The idea of virtual embedding is to simulate the matching network and avoid using physical circuitry so that the analyzer ports can be directly connected to the input and output ports of the DUT.
  • Page 190 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding To be numerically removed, the real network must be described by a set of S-parame- ters or by an equivalent circuit of lumped elements. Deembedding the DUT effectively extends the calibration plane towards the DUT ports, enabling a realistic evaluation of the DUT without the distorting network.
  • Page 191 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding The following networks are composed of a shunt C or L (as seen from the analyzer port), followed by a serial C or L. They are named Shunt C, Serial L / Shunt L, Serial C / Shunt C, Serial C / Shunt L, Serial L.
  • Page 192 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding parameters, or the entire transformation network can be described by imported 4-port S-parameters. The first network is defined by its S-parameters stored in an imported four-port Touch- stone file (*.s4p). No additional parameters are required. The following networks are composed of a shunt C or L and two serial elements, described by imported 2-port S-parameters.
  • Page 193 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding Since FW version 1.93, the "capacitance C<i> in parallel with resistance R<i>" circuit blocks can alternatively be represented as "capacitance C<i> in parallel with conduc- tance G<i>" circuit blocks. 4.6.2.5 Port pair de-/embedding Port pair de-/embedding extends the functionality of balanced port de-/embedding to pairs of single-ended physical ports.
  • Page 194 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding Network Analyzer Embedding Network 2m-1 Figure 4-11: Port Set De-/Embedding As shown in section Combining Several de-/embedding networks, port set deembed- ding is calculated after single-ended deembedding, and the port set embedding step precedes single ended embedding.
  • Page 195 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding ● For the R&S ZND, each port set can consist of m = 2 ports ● For these port pairs, the de-/embedding network can be defined either via lumped element model (possibly in combination with s2p Touchstone files) or via a s4p Touchstone file, see Chapter 4.6.2.5, "Port pair de-/embedding",...
  • Page 196 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding Differential Matching Network Balun In contrast to standard balanced embedding (4-port), the matching circuit is only applied to the differential mode port (2-port). It can be specified via a Touchstone s2p file or by parametrizing a lumped "Shunt L, Shunt C"...
  • Page 197 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding Fixture Modeling Process For all supported tools, the fixture modeling proceeds as follows: 1. Perform a calibration to the fixture connectors. 2. Measure one or more PCB test coupons for the related fixture. The results are independent of a particular DUT.
  • Page 198 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding Test Coupons for Lead-ins Test Coupons for Lead-outs 2x Through 2x Through 1x Open 1x Short 1x Open 1x Short Figure 4-13: Test Coupons (balanced) Test Coupons for Lead-ins Test Coupons for Lead-outs 2x Through 2x Through 1x Open...
  • Page 199 ® Concepts and features R&S Offset parameters and de-/embedding Figure 4-15: De-/Embedding calculation flow This means that the real networks are removed before virtual networks are added. The (de-)embedding steps are carried out in the following order: 1. Single Ended Deembedding: every physical port can be deembedded from a single 2-port network 2.

  • Page 200: Optional Extensions And Accessories

    "Options" tab of the Info dialog (SYSTEM – [SETUP] > "Setup" > "Info..."). Table 4-15: Software options (K-options) Option Option name R&S ZND-K1 Frequency range extension to 8.5 GHz for unidirec- tional R&S ZND R&S ZND-K2 Time domain analysis R&S ZND-K3 Distance-to-fault measurements...

  • Page 201: Frequency Range Extension To 8.5 Ghz For Unidirectional R&S Znd

    4.7.1 Frequency range extension to 8.5 GHz for unidirectional R&S ZND Option R&S ZND-K1 Software option R&S ZND-K1 increases the upper frequency limit of a unidirectional R&S ZND (i.e. not equipped with R&S ZND-K5) from 4.5 GHz to 8.5 GHz.

  • Page 202: Bidirectional Measurements 100 Khz To 4.5 Ghz For R&S Znd

    Option R&S ZND-K5 Software option R&S ZND-K5 enables bidirectional measurements for a R&S ZND with standard frequency range (i.e without option R&S ZND-K1). Recalibration Required Although this is a software option, the R&S ZND has to be recalibrated at Rohde &...

  • Page 203: Time Domain Analysis

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.5 Time domain analysis Option R&S ZND-K2 The network analyzer measures and displays complex S-parameters and other quanti- ties as a function of the frequency. The measurement results can be filtered and math- ematically transformed to obtain the time domain representation, which often gives a clearer insight into the characteristics of the DUT.
  • Page 204 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories GHz/200 = 2 * 10 Hz, so that Δt = 50 ns. Δt is termed measurement range (in time domain) or unambiguous range. Additional constraints apply if the selected Chirp z-transformation is a lowpass transfor- mation.
  • Page 205 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Integrate impulse response Obtain step response The step response is recommended for impedance measurements and for the analysis of discontinuities (especially inductive and capacitive discontinuities). The impulse response has an unambiguous magnitude and is therefore recommended for most other applications.
  • Page 206 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories The point symmetry with respect to the DC value makes harmonic grids suitable for lowpass time domain transformations. Visualization of the harmonic grid algorithms The R&S ZND provides three different algorithms for harmonic grid calculation. The three harmonic grids have the following characteristics: ●...
  • Page 207 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories The harmonic grids cannot be calculated for any set of sweep points. If the minimum number of sweep points is smaller than 5, then the interpolation/extrapolation algorithm for additional sweep points does not work. The same is true if the number of sweep points or stop frequency exceeds the upper limit.
  • Page 208 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Window Side lobe Passband Best for... suppression ripple Normal Gate 32 dB 0.032 dB Good compromise between edge steepness (Hann) and side lobe suppression Maximum Flat- 46 dB 0 dB Maximum attenuation of responses outside the ness (Bohman) gate span Arbitrary Gate...
  • Page 209 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.5.6 Time domain S measurements VSWR The vector network analyzer R&S ZND with time domain option K2 supports TD site VSWR measurements. For the frequency range 1 GHz to 18 GHz, this method of S measurement is pro- VSWR posed in standard ANSI C63.25.

  • Page 210: Distance-To-Fault Measurements

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories TD S Calculation VSWR The ANSI time-domain method relies on a complex transmission measurement (S using a vector network analyzer (VNA). A time-domain transformation of the frequency domain data shows the impulse response between the two antennas.
  • Page 211 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Adjust the frequency sweep to the length of the transmission line and the expected dis- tance to fault: ● The maximum distance that can be measured is proportional to the number of sweep points.

  • Page 212: Frequency Resolution 1 Mhz

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories ● For a unidirectional R&S ZND, only port 1 can be used for distance-to-fault mea- surements. ● A more flexible approach with additional configuration possibilities is available with time domain option R&S ZND-K2 (see Chapter 4.7.5, "Time domain analysis", on page 203).
  • Page 213 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-16: Fixture modeling: EZD – Single Ended Ports dialog Figure 4-17: Fixture modeling: EZD – Balanced Ports dialog ● For general information about fixture de-embedding, see Chapter 4.6.2.9, "Fixture modeling and deembedding", on page 196.

  • Page 214: In-Situ De-Embedding

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.9 In-situ de-embedding Option R&S ZND-K220 This option offers a pre-installed or service-retrofitted version of AtaiTec's In Situ De- Embedding (ISD) tool for fixture de-embedding. The tool is integrated into the de-embedding functionality of the analyzer firmware. ●...

  • Page 215: Delta-L 4.0 Pcb Characterization

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.11 Delta-L 4.0 PCB characterization Option R&S ZND-K231 Delta-L is a de-embedding methodology developed by Intel Corporation and is used for de-embedding strip lines that include vias. Delta-L calculates the loss of PCB intercon- nects and can be performed on single-ended or balanced interconnects.

  • Page 216: Health And Usage Monitoring Service (Hums)

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.12 Health and usage monitoring service (HUMS) Option R&S ZND-K980 The R&S ZND comes with a health and utilization monitoring system (HUMS) providing information about the R&S ZND. Aim is to increase the overall utilization, to avoid downtime and to increase the overall security level of a fleet of instruments.

  • Page 217: High Output Power For R&S Znd

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.13 High output power for R&S ZND Option R&S ZND-B7 With hardware option R&S ZND-B7, the output power of the R&S ZND can be signifi- cantly increased: Frequencies Maximum Output Power with R&S ZND-B7 without R&S ZND-B7 ≤...

  • Page 218: Additional Removable System Drive

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.16 Additional removable system drive Option R&S ZND-B19 Option R&S ZND-B19 provides an additional removable system drive for the R&S ZND, including operating system and VNA firmware. See the data sheet for the available variants of this option. 4.7.17 Extended power range Option R&S ZND-K7 For the R&S ZND, software option R&S ZND-K7 enables an extended power range of...
  • Page 219 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories ● Extended measurement functionality: Each external power meter represents an additional receive port. External power meters increase the number of RF input sig- nals of a DUT that the analyzer can measure simultaneously. They can also pro- vide accurate results for signals at inaccurate or unknown frequencies.

  • Page 220: External Switch Matrices

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories trol elements of the R&S ZND, e.g. in the port configuration and in the power calibra- tion dialogs. 4.7.19.1 Zeroing Zeroing calibrates the external power meter by adjusting its reading at zero signal power.
  • Page 221 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories ted to a 2-port analyzer via a 2x6 matrix (e.g. a R&S ZN-Z8x base unit without exten- sions). For each stimulus port, 5 sweeps are required to measure the resulting b- waves, 6·5 = 30 sweeps in total.
  • Page 222 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Example: The 4x24 extension of switch matrix R&S ZN-Z84 consists of 2 separate 2x12 subma- trices. Matrix VNA ports of the "left" submatrix cannot be connected to the test ports of the "right"...
  • Page 223 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories ZV-Z82-16 Figure 4-21: ZV-Z82-16: limited connectivity 4.7.20.4 Multiple paths: precision vs. speed A switch matrix can offer multiple routes to a given matrix test port. Hence, measure- ments can be performed using different physical paths, where a path consists of the traversed VNA connections and matrix routes.
  • Page 224 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Priority 1 Routes Priority 2 Routes Figure 4-22: ZV-Z81 Routes and priorities Example: For an R&S ZN-Z8x, each route traverses exactly one of the equipped 2x6 modules. The overall route quality is determined by the number of solid state switches traversed on this 2x6 module: 2x6 Module Priority 1 Routes...
  • Page 225 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories For every supported switch matrix, the available routes are prioritized according to the number of switches they traverse (the rectangles in Figure 4-22). ● To obtain highest measurement precision, the driving port uses the "best possible" (highest priority) route.

  • Page 226: External Dlls

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories 2-port VNA Route 1 Route 2 This kind of "multipath calibration" offers the following additional benefit: During manual calibration, the measured reflection/transmission coefficients are pre- sented as memory traces – one per path. By comparing these traces, it should be pos- sible to track down hardware problems (cables, connectors, matrix, ...) already during calibration.
  • Page 227 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories 4.7.21.1 Basic use case A basic use case is the integration of a power supply into an arbitrary VNA sweep. Suppose that you want to test an amplifier with various bias settings. To do so, you can perform a CW sweep to measure S-parameters with different gate voltages applied to the amplifier at each sweep point.

  • Page 228: R&S Znxsim

    ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories If an external DLL is configured for permanent use, it performs a particular task (such as switching the state of a DUT or controlling external devices) without providing data. 4.7.21.3 Trace calculation in the channel calculation chain To enable the calculation of trace results using data from external DLLs, a dedicated calculation step for external DLLs is inserted directly before the averaging step in the calculation chain (see...
  • Page 229 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories Figure 4-24: Instrument selection For information on installation and licensing, see the R&S ZNXSIM Getting Started manual available at https://www.rohde-schwarz.com/manual/ZNXSIM. 4.7.22.1 Simulation data The firmware simulation displays traces. To this end, it loads simulation data from one or more files, by default from C:\Program Files\Rohde-Schwarz\Vector Network Analyzer\ZNB\ Resources\Simulation\Measurements\...
  • Page 230 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories By default, the firmware simulation applies InputBufferGroupSimulation.s4p to all channels in all setups. For each setup in the firmware simulation, you have three possibilities to define and refine the simulated DUT. 1.
  • Page 231 ® Concepts and features R&S Optional extensions and accessories ● Since version 3.40 of the analyzer firmware, simulation noise can be activated or deactivated from the analyzer GUI. Chapter 5.14.6, "More tab", on page 523. ● Make sure to deactivate "Simulation Noise" before exporting traces to file (see Chapter 4.4.2, "Trace files", on page 134).

  • Page 232: Gui Reference

    ® GUI reference R&S Function Keys and Softtools 5 GUI reference This chapter describes the Graphical User Interface (GUI) of the analyzer. The most convenient way to access the GUI functions is via Softtools. Hence the GUI reference is structured accordingly. The softtools, in turn, can be opened via the keys on the front panel of the analyzer, via the on-screen Hardkey panel...
  • Page 233 ® GUI reference R&S Function Keys and Softtools Table 5-1: Function keys and softtools (Virtual) Hardkey Keyboard Shortcut Related Softtool Action TRACE – [MEAS] Alt + Shift + A Meas softtool default TRACE – [FORMAT] Alt + Shift + B Format softtool default TRACE –...

  • Page 234: Meas Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool (Virtual) Hardkey Keyboard Shortcut Related Softtool Action CHANNEL – [OFF- Alt + Shift + Q Offset Embed softtool default SET EMBED] SYSTEM – [FILE] Ctrl + O File softtool default SYSTEM – [PRINT] Ctrl + P "File"...

  • Page 235: S-Params Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool 5.2.1 S-Params tab Selects S-parameters as measured quantities. S-parameters are the basic measured quantities of a network analyzer. They describe how the DUT modifies a signal that is transmitted or reflected in forward or reverse direction. S-parameters (and derived quantities such as Y- and Z-parameters) fully characterize a linear DUT.
  • Page 236 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Note: For a unidirectional R&S ZND (see Chapter 4.1.4.3, "R&S ZND: unidirectional vs. bidirectional operation", on page 79) the reverse direction cannot be measured. Hence S and balanced measurements are not available. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure:SENDed CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine...
  • Page 237 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool 5.2.1.2 S-Parameter Wizard The "S-Parameter Wizard" guides you through the setup of a standard two-port S- parameter measurement in a frequency sweep. This dialog is not available if a switch matrix is configured. Access: TRACE – [MEAS] > "S-Params" > "S-Param Wizard..." The wizard proceeds in the following steps: 1.
  • Page 238 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Note: For a unidirectional R&S ZND (see Chapter 4.1.4.3, "R&S ZND: unidirec- tional vs. bidirectional operation", on page 79) balanced measurements are not supported. 3. Select the measurement parameters and the diagram areas. Depending on the test setup selected in step 1, the wizard offers different sets of S- parameters.
  • Page 239 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Instrument reset To obtain a predictable result, the measurement wizard has to reset all settings except the current calibration data. Store your recall set if you do not want to lose the current configuration. 5.2.1.3 Balanced Ports dialog The "Balanced Ports"...
  • Page 240 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool ● For a balanced port, two physical ports are combined to form a single logical port. ● For unused ports, the physical port is crossed out; no logical port number is assigned. For a unidirectional R&S ZND (see Chapter 4.1.4.3, "R&S ZND: unidirectional vs.
  • Page 241 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool In principle, it is possible to combine any pair of two physical analyzer ports into a bal- anced port. With n test ports a maximum of n/2 (n even) or (n – 1)/2 (n odd) logical ports is supported.
  • Page 242 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Define Physical to Logical Port Relation Allows you to define balanced, single-ended, and unused ports. The two physical ports of the analyzer can be combined into a balanced port. ● To define a balanced port, select two physical ports and tap "Balanced". ●...
  • Page 243 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Single-ended Physical Port Logical Port (unbalanced) port ref, default connector Single- ended port Balanced port: Differential mode Balanced port Common mode Analyzer For a unidirectional R&S ZND (see Chapter 4.1.4.3, "R&S ZND: unidirectional vs. bidir- ectional operation", on page 79) balanced measurements are not available.

  • Page 244: Ratios Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Refer to Chapter 4.3.2, "Reference impedances", on page 109. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:IMPedance:RNORmal 5.2.2 Ratios tab Selects ratios of wave quantities as measured quantities. Background information Refer to Chapter 4.3.5, "Wave quantities and ratios", on page 116. 5.2.2.1 Controls on the Ratios tab left = bidirectional R&S ZND...
  • Page 245 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool The predefined wave quantities correspond to the 2-port S-parameters: ● "b1/a1 Source Port 1" is the ratio of the wave quantities b and a , measured at port 1. This ratio corresponds to the S-parameter S (input reflection coefficient).
  • Page 246 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool For a unidirectional R&S ZND (see Chapter 4.1.4.3, "R&S ZND: unidirectional vs. bidir- ectional operation", on page 79) only port 1 may serve as source and hence the corre- sponding control is disabled. The notation for ratios follows the usual scheme of the vector network analyzer: ●...

  • Page 247: Wave Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "<Ratio>" CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "<Ratio>" Detector Selects the algorithm that is used to calculate the results points from the raw measure- ment data. For details refer to Chapter 4.3.5.3, "Detector settings", on page 118.
  • Page 248 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool The predefined wave quantities are obtained with different source ports. "a1 Source Port 1", "b1 Source Port 1" and "b1 Source Port 2" are measured at Port 1 of the ana- lyzer. "a2 Source Port 2, b2 Source Port 1" and "b2 Source Port 2" are measured at Port 2 of the analyzer.
  • Page 249 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool The notation for wave quantities follows the usual scheme of the vector network ana- lyzer: ● The a-waves are the outgoing/transmitted waves at the analyzer's test ports. ● The b-waves are the incoming/measured waves. ●...

  • Page 250: Z←Sij Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool P = V / Re(Z denotes the reference impedance of the source port (for wave quantities a ) or of the receive port (for wave quantities b ). The reference impedances are defined in the "Balanced Ports"...
  • Page 251 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Z←S<out><in> selector Selects a converted impedance parameter as a measured quantity for the active trace. For an n-port vector network analyzer, the pull-down list provides the full set of n impedance parameters. Converted impedance parameters are expressed as Z←S , where <out>...

  • Page 252: Y←Sij Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "Z-S12" | "Z-S12SER" | "Z-S12PAR" | ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "Z-S12" | "Z-S12SER" | "Z-S12PAR" | ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", 'SHUNT-S12' | 'SHUNT-S21' CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", 'SHUNT-S12' | 'SHUNT-S21' Balanced Ports... Opens a dialog to configure the logical ports of the analyzer. Chapter 5.2.1.3, "Balanced Ports dialog", on page 239.
  • Page 253 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Y←S<out><in> selector Selects a converted admittance parameter as a measured quantity for the active trace. For an n-port vector network analyzer, the pull-down list provides the full set of n admittance parameters. Converted admittance parameters are expressed as Y←S , where <out>...

  • Page 254: Y-Z-Params Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "Y-S12" | "Y-S12SER" | "Y-S12PAR" | ... CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "Y-S12" | "Y-S12SER" | "Y-S12PAR" | ... Balanced Ports... Opens a dialog to configure the logical ports of the analyzer. Chapter 5.2.1.3, "Balanced Ports dialog", on page 239.
  • Page 255 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Y/Z-Parameter Selects an Y-parameter Z-parameter as a measured quantity for the active trace. For an n-port vector network analyzer, the pull-down list provides the full set of n and Z-parameters. Y- and Z-parameters are expressed as Y/Z , where <out>...

  • Page 256: Imbal. Cmrr Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "Z11" | "Z12" | "Z21" | "Z22" CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "Z11" | "Z12" | "Z21" | "Z22" Balanced Ports... Opens a dialog to define a balanced port configuration. Balanced Ports dialog. 5.2.7 Imbal.
  • Page 257 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool This button is only enabled, if a balanced and two single-ended logical ports are available. ● "Balanced Ports...": see Chapter 5.2.1.3, "Balanced Ports dialog", on page 239 Imbalance/CMRR Selects an imbalance or CMRR parameter as a measured quantity for the active trace. These parameters are expressed as "Imb "...
  • Page 258 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool This dialog can only be opened, if a balanced and two single-ended logical ports are configured in the Balanced Ports dialog. ● The Logical Port on the left represents the balanced test port: any (active) bal- anced logical port can be selected ●...

  • Page 259: Stability Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool 5.2.8 Stability tab Selects one of the three two port stability factors K, μ or μ as measured quantities. A typical application of stability factors is to assess the stability of an amplifier. Stability factors cannot be calculated in balanced port configurations.

  • Page 260: Power Sensor Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure "<Trace_Name>", "MUF121" | "MUF221" | "KFAC21" CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine "<Trace_Name>", "MUF121" | "MUF221" | "KFAC21" Balanced Ports... Opens a dialog to define a balanced port configuration. Chapter 5.2.1.3, "Balanced Ports dialog", on page 239. 5.2.9 Power Sensor tab Allows you to set up and perform measurements using external power sensors.

  • Page 261: External Dll Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Auto Zero Initiates an automatic zeroing procedure of the selected power meter. The power meter must be disconnected from the RF power; see Chapter 4.7.19.1, "Zeroing", on page 220. A message indicates that zeroing is finished. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:PMETer<Pmtr>:AZERo Source Port...
  • Page 262 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Configuration / Perm. Settings Opens the External DLL Configuration Dialog. Measurement The "Measurement" section gives access to the custom traces of the loaded plug-ins. Each external DLL <ext_dll_name>.dll that provides at least one custom trace type, adds a measurement button "<ext_dll_name>"...
  • Page 263 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Permanent ← Loaded DLLs table Defines the task that is selected via Task Type and further defined via "Additional Input" on page 263 as permanent. A permanent task can interact with the firmware, even if it currently does not provide any traces, e.g.
  • Page 264 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool The firmware must be run as administrator to add or remove custom plugins. Once installed, standard user privileges are sufficient to use a plugin's functionality. Remote command: [SENSe:]CDLL:ADD [SENSe:]CDLL:REMove Configure Device Adress Opens an additional dialog that allows you to specify the addresses of external devices the external DLL requires to complete its tasks.
  • Page 265 ® GUI reference R&S Meas softtool Access: External DLL tab > "Measurement" section buttons Figure 5-1: Trace Definition dialog In the VNA firmware, the following string represents the measured quantity: Cu(P<Src Port>)<lowercase_ext_dll_name>/<Task Type>/<Additional Input> This string is displayed in the trace info and in the "Trace Manager". You can also use it to specify the corresponding <Result>...

  • Page 266: Format Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Format softtool 5.3 Format softtool The "Format" softtool allows you to define how the measured data is presented in the diagram area. Access: TRACE – [FORMAT] Measured quantities and display formats The analyzer allows arbitrary combinations of display formats and measured quantities (see Chapter 5.2, "Meas softtool",...
  • Page 267 ® GUI reference R&S Format softtool Application: dB Mag is the default format for the complex, dimensionless S-parame- ters. The dB-scale is the natural scale for measurements related to power ratios (inser- tion loss, gain etc.). Tip (alternative formats): The magnitude of each complex quantity can be displayed on a linear scale.
  • Page 268 ® GUI reference R&S Format softtool Properties: The polar diagram shows the measured data (response values) in the complex plane with a horizontal real axis and a vertical imaginary axis. The magnitude of a complex value is determined by its distance from the center, its phase is given by the angle from the positive horizontal axis.
  • Page 269 ® GUI reference R&S Format softtool Properties: The stimulus variable appears on the horizontal axis, scaled linearly. The phase of the complex quantity C, i.e. φ (C) = arctan ( Im(C) / Re(C) ), appears on the vertical axis. φ (C) is measured relative to the phase at the start of the sweep (refer- ence phase = 0°).
  • Page 270 ® GUI reference R&S Format softtool Tip (alternative formats): It is possible to view the magnitude and phase of a complex quantity instead of the real and imaginary part. The magnitude can be displayed on a linear scale or on a logarithmic scale. Both the real and imaginary parts are displayed in the polar diagram.
  • Page 271 ® GUI reference R&S Format softtool Application: Transmission measurements, especially with the purpose of investigating deviations from linear phase response and phase distortions. To obtain the delay, a fre- quency sweep must be active. Tip: The cables between the analyzer test ports and the DUT introduce an unwanted delay, which often can be assumed to be constant.

  • Page 272: Scale Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Scale softtool 5.4 Scale softtool The "Scale" softtool allows you to define how the active trace is displayed in its current format. Access: TRACE – [SCALE] hardkey 5.4.1 Scale Values tab Provides the functions for diagram scaling. The "Scale Values"...
  • Page 273 ® GUI reference R&S Scale softtool Alternatives to Scaling There are several alternatives to manual trace/diagram scaling. Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 3.3.6, "Scaling diagrams", on page 58 ● Chapter 5.8.1, "Stimulus tab", on page 359 Auto Scale Trace Adjusts the "Scale/Div"...

  • Page 274: Scale Coupling Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Scale softtool symbol corresponds to the trace color. As the "Ref Value" is varied, the position of the reference line ("Ref Pos") is left unchanged, so that the current trace is shifted in vertical direction. The unit of the "Ref Value" depends on the display format: dB for display format "dB Mag", degrees for "Phase"...

  • Page 275: Zoom Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Scale softtool The "Trace Manager..." button opens the Trace Manager dialog. Couple All Traces / Couple Trc ... To Trace Applies the scale settings of the reference trace ("To Trace") to all traces / to the active trace.
  • Page 276 ® GUI reference R&S Scale softtool Alternatives to Zooming There are several alternatives to graphical/numerical zooming. Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 3.3.6, "Scaling diagrams", on page 58 ● Chapter 5.4.1, "Scale Values tab", on page 272 ● Chapter 5.8.1, "Stimulus tab", on page 359 Mode Graphical Zoom/Mode Stimulus Zoom...

  • Page 277: Trace Config Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM[:STATe] Zoom Reset If a graphical zoom has been applied to the current diagram, this action resets the zoom area. Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM[:STATe] Overview On If a graphical zoom has been applied to the active diagram (and has not been reset, this button toggles the overview for this diagram.
  • Page 278 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool In remote control, each channel can contain an active trace. The active remote traces and the active manual trace are independent of each other; see Chapter 6.3.2, "Active traces in remote control", on page 613. 5.5.1.1 Controls on the Traces tab The "Trace Manager..."...
  • Page 279 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Add Tr+Diag Copies the active trace (within the active channel), assigns it to a new diagram, and makes the new trace the active one. "Copies" means that the new trace is created with the settings of the former active trace.
  • Page 280 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Same functionality as the toggle button of the Chapter 3.3.2.2, "Toolbar", on page 45 ● "Disable all Disables all channels, except the active one ● other Measure- Disables all traces in the active channel, except the active one ●...
  • Page 281 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool All existing traces of the current recall set are listed in a table with several editable (white) or non-editable (gray) columns. Table Area The table contains the following columns: ● "Name" indicates name of the related trace. Trace names must be unambiguous across all channels and diagram areas in a recall set.

  • Page 282: Mem Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool The default names for new traces are "Trc<n>", where <n> is selected by the analyzer firmware to make trace names unambiguous. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine Delete Deletes the selected trace. This button is disabled if the recall set contains only one trace: In manual control, each recall set must contain at least one diagram area with one channel and one trace.
  • Page 283 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Coupling of data and memory traces When a memory trace is generated from a data trace, it is displayed in the same dia- gram area and inherits all channel and trace settings from the data trace. The memory trace displayed in the active diagram;...
  • Page 284 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Data to <Destination> Stores the current state of the active data trace to the Destination memory trace. No trace functions are applied to the stored trace. Tips: ● Data & Func to <Destination> to apply trace functions to the stored trace.

  • Page 285: All Mem All Data Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Show <Mem> Shows or hides the active memory trace or the first memory trace of the active data trace. If no memory trace is associated with the active data trace, "Show <Mem>" is disabled. Remote command: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:SHOW 5.5.3 All Mem All Data tab...

  • Page 286: Math Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:MEMorize Destination Selects the destination for the All Data to <Destination> All Data & Func to <Desti- nation> functions, that operate on all data traces in the active recall set. ● "Mem": For each data trace with associated memory traces, the current trace data are cop- ied to the first associated memory trace, overwriting existing data.
  • Page 287 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool 5.5.4.1 Controls on the Math tab The "Define Math..." buttons in the "Complex Data" and "Formatted Data" sections both open the User Def Math dialog, but with different scope: ● "Complex Data" > "Define Math..." defines mathematical operations on raw com- plex trace data.
  • Page 288 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool "Trace Math" is enabled if the active data trace fulfills the conditions for evaluating the mathematical relation. E.g., if no "User Defined" mathematical relation is defined, a memory trace must be coupled to the active data trace, so that the R&S ZND can eval- uate one of the relations "Data / <Mem>"...
  • Page 289 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Compatibility between traces in mathematical relations Mathematical traces are either constant functions or functions of one or more data or memory traces. They are calculated on a point-to-point basis. Each trace point no. i of the mathematical trace is calculated from a set of constant values c , ..., c plus the...
  • Page 290 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool The effect of the basic arithmetic operators (/, *, –, +) and the mathematical – functions is described in Table 5-2. Products of numbers and constants can be entered in abbreviated form, e.g. 2e for 2*e.
  • Page 291 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool ● In time sweeps, "StimVal" is the stimulus time in s. ● In CW mode sweeps, "StimVal" is the number of the point. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MATH[:EXPRession]:SDEFine CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted[:EXPRession]:SDEFine Result is Wave Quantity "Result is Wave Quantity" controls the conversion and formatting of the mathematic expression.

  • Page 292: Time Domain Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:WUNit[:STATe] Recall... / Save... Recalls / saves a mathematical expression from / to a trace math string file. Trace math string files are ASCII files with the default extension *.mth and contain the mathemati- cal expression as it is written in the "User Def Math"...
  • Page 293 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool "Low Pass Settings..." opens the Low Pass Settings dialog. Time Domain Selects the time domain representation for the active diagram area. The softkey is enabled if a linear frequency sweep is active (see "Lin Freq"...
  • Page 294 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Note: The frequency domain window is used to filter the trace before transforming it to the time domain. An independent "Time Gate" can be used after the transformation to eliminate unwanted responses (see Chapter 5.5.6, "Time Gate tab", on page 297).
  • Page 295 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool 5.5.5.2 Low Pass Settings dialog The "Low Pass Settings" dialog defines the harmonic grid for low pass time domain transforms. Access: TRACE – [TRACE CONFIG] > "Time Domain" > "Low Pass Settings..." Background information Refer to Chapter 4.7.5.4, "Harmonic grid",...
  • Page 296 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool The three grids can be calculated repeatedly in any order; the analyzer always starts from the original set of sweep points. For more information, refer to Chapter 4.7.5.4, "Harmonic grid", on page 205. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs Automatic Harmonic Grid...

  • Page 297: Time Gate Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam:EXTRapolate CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPFRequency 5.5.6 Time Gate tab Defines and activates a gate in the time domain. An active time gate acts on the trace in time domain and in frequency domain representation. In time domain representation, you can use the time gate settings to eliminate unwanted responses in your signal.
  • Page 298 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Time Gate Enables or disables the time gate for the time domain and frequency domain traces. "Gat" is displayed in the trace list while the time gate is active. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:STATe Axis Pair "Start Stop"...

  • Page 299: Distance To Fault Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Side Lobe Level Defines the side lobe suppression for an "Arbitrary Gate Shape (Dolph-Chebychev)" gate. The entered value is the ratio of the power of the central lobe to the power of the first side lobe in dB.
  • Page 300 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool The "Evaluation Range..." button opens the "Evaluation Range" dialog (see Chap- ter 5.5.8.2, "Evaluation Range dialog", on page 304). The "Decimal Places..." button opens the "System Config" dialog to define the (maxi- mum) number of fractional digits for setting values and measurement results. See also "User Interface tab"...
  • Page 301 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Format This setting determines how Min/Max/Peak-Peak, Mean/Std Dev/RMS for complex-val- ued traces (Smith, Polar) are calculated: ● "ZVAB": the results are based on unformatted wave quantities (voltages) ● "R + jX": the results are based on the impedance values R and X ●...
  • Page 302 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Suppose that A and B denote the trace points at the beginning and at the end of the evaluation range, respectively. ● "Gain" is the larger of the two stimulus values of points A and B. ●...
  • Page 303 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool ● "Cmp In" is the stimulus level at the compression point in units of dBm. "Cmp In" always corresponds to the driving port level (e.g. the level from port no. j, if a trans- mission parameter S is measured).
  • Page 304 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:STARt CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:STOP CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:SHOW Defined Value This setting is only visible if "Defined Value" is used as Reference Value. It manually defines the reference value ("small signal value") for the compression point calculation. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RLEVel CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RPHase...

  • Page 305: Smooth Shift Hold Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Evaluation Range Selects a predefined evaluation range. Up to 10 different ranges are available for each recall set. "Full Span" means that the search range is equal to the entire sweep range. The trace statistics functions consider all measurement points with stimulus values x between the "Start"...
  • Page 306 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Smoothing Activates the smoothing function for the active trace, which can be a data or a memory trace. With smoothing active, the trace value at each sweep point is replaced by the arith- metic mean of the trace values at the sweep point itself, and at neighboring sweep points (symmetrically, to the left and to the right).
  • Page 307 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool where N is the number of points of the sweep (or sweep segment for segmented sweeps). Smoothing interval Length: a/100·N Midpoint n – a/100·N/2 n + a/100·N/2 Sweep points inside the smoothing interval The range definition above takes boder cases and rounding into account.
  • Page 308 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool A "Stimulus" shift can be used in cartesian and in complex diagrams. The visible effect depends on the diagram type: ● In cartesian diagrams, the trace is shifted relative to the markers and the x-axis. ●...

  • Page 309: Infinite Averaging Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool 5.5.10 Infinite Averaging tab The controls on the "Infinite Averaging " tab allow you configure infinite averaging for the active trace. Infinite averaging means the average at a sweep point is taken over all trace values at this sweep point since the previous restart of the averaging cycle.
  • Page 310 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool left = bidirectional R&S ZND right = unidirectional R&S ZND All buttons on the "Trace Data" tab serve as "openers" for related dialogs: ● "Import..." calls up a dialog to load a memory trace from a trace file; see Chap- ter 5.5.11.1, "Import Complex Data dialog",...
  • Page 311 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Background information Refer to Chapter 4.4.2, "Trace files", on page 134. On loading data from a trace file with several traces, the analyzer displays a dialog to select one or more of the traces stored in the file (see Chapter 5.5.11.3, "Select Param- eter dialog",...
  • Page 312 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool ● TRACE – [TRACE CONFIG] > "Trace Data" > "Export" – ... Data export can serve many purposes, e.g.: ● To process and evaluate measurement data in an external application. ● To store measurement data and reimport it in a future measurement session. Background information Refer to the following sections: ●...
  • Page 313 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Figure 5-3: ASCII Trace files export For a unidirectional R&S ZND, export to s2p is not available. The "Export Data - <File Type>" dialog is a standard "Save File" dialog with several additional buttons to specify the export options. Many options depend on the selected export file format ("Files of type").
  • Page 314 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Output Format Selects the format of the exported raw, complex measurement values. The exported values can be represented by the real and imaginary parts, the linear magnitude and phase, or dB magnitude and phase; see also "Formatted Values"...
  • Page 315 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Add Ref Impedances For ASCII (*.csv) or Matlab (*.dat) files only: Includes the reference impedances Z for all analyzer ports in the file header. Formatted Values For ASCII (*.csv) or Matlab (*.dat) files only: Selects the format for the exported trace data.
  • Page 316 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool If empty (←"Delete"), no comment is added. Remote command: MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:OPTion:COMMent 5.5.11.3 Select Parameter dialog The "Select Parameter" dialog provides a selection of measurement results (e.g. S- parameters) or traces, e.g. for trace import, import of power correction coefficients, limit line import.
  • Page 317 ® GUI reference R&S Trace Config softtool Checks and Messages in the Dialog After each port or channel selection, the R&S ZND checks the channel data for com- patibility with the trace export conditions. If data from "All Channels" are exported, every channel must contain a compatible set of traces;...

  • Page 318: Lines Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool 5.6 Lines softtool The "Lines" softtool allows you to define limits for the measurement results, visualize them in the diagrams and activate/deactivate the limit check. The analyzer provides upper, lower, ripple and circle limits. In addition, the "Lines" softtool provides functions to limit complex diagrams to a user-defined "Display Circle"...
  • Page 319 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool Show Limit Line Shows or hides the limit line associated with the active trace in a Cartesian diagram area. The limit line colors are defined in the Define User Color Scheme dialog (SYSTEM > [DISPLAY] >...
  • Page 320 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool Note: ● Limit check and display of limit lines are independent of each other: – The limit lines can be displayed, no matter if the limit check is enabled. – If "Limit Check" is enabled, the limits are checked, no matter if the limit lines are displayed.
  • Page 321 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool ● "PASS" represents pass for all traces with enabled limit check. A trace without limit lines or with disabled individual limit check always passes the global check. ● "FAIL" means that the limit check for one or more traces failed. Remote command: CALCulate:CLIMits:FAIL? TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass...
  • Page 322 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool Note: Default values "TTL1 Pass" / "TTL2 Pass" for new traces can be set in the "Advanced" tab of the "System Config" dialog (see "TTL Pass Default Values" on page 562). Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:TTLout<Pt>[:STATe] Shift Lines By setting the "Stimulus"...
  • Page 323 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool Creating limit lines with minimum effort Choose one of the following methods to create and handle limit lines efficiently: ● To define limit lines with only a few segments, select "Add" and edit each segment in the Segment List individually.
  • Page 324 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool Add / Insert / Delete / Delete All The first four buttons below the segment list extend or shorten the list. The analyzer places no restriction on the number of segments in a limit line. ●...
  • Page 325 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool ● "Import File..." opens a dialog to load a limit line from a trace file (see Chap- ter 5.5.11, "Trace Data tab", on page 309). In case the selected file contains more than one trace, another popup dialog lets you select the adequate one: Imported traces are polygonal curves with n points and n –...

  • Page 326: Ripple Test Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool For convenience, "Type", "Start Stimulus", "Stop Stimulus", and "Interpolation" are repeated from the Segment List of the "Define Limit Lines" dialog. Linear/Formula Allows you to decide how to define the line segment. ● "Linear": Define the line segment as a straight line, connecting the endpoints ("Start Stimulus","Start Response") and ("Stop Stimulus","Stop Response").
  • Page 327 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool 5.6.2.1 Controls on the Ripple Test tab The "Def. Ripple Test..." button opens the "Define Ripple Test" dialog (see Chap- ter 5.6.2.2, "Define Ripple Test dialog", on page 329). Show Ripple Limits Shows or hides the ripple limit lines associated with the active trace in a Cartesian dia- gram area.
  • Page 328 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool Note: ● Ripple check and display of limit lines are independent of each other: – The ripple limits can be displayed, no matter if the ripple check is enabled. – If "Ripple Check" is enabled, the ripple limits are checked, no matter if they are displayed.
  • Page 329 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool 5.6.2.2 Define Ripple Test dialog The "Define Ripple Test" dialog defines the ripple limits for the active trace on a range- by-range basis. A separate ripple limit can be assigned to each range. Access: TRACE – [LINE] > "Ripple Test" > "Def. Ripple Test..." Defining ripple limits with minimum effort Choose one of the following methods to create and handle ripple limit ranges effi- ciently:...
  • Page 330 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool The ripple limit range is displayed as two parallel, horizontal lines in the diagram. "Stop Stimulus" - "Start Stimulus" is the length of both lines (if the range is within the sweep range); "Ripple Limit" is their vertical distance. See Chapter 4.4.1.2, "Rules for ripple test definition",...

  • Page 331: Circle Test Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool 5.6.3 Circle Test tab Defines circular limit lines for complex trace formats ("Polar", "Smith", "Inv Smith"), vis- ualizes them in the diagram and activates/deactivates the circle limit check. Most of the control elements in the "Circle Test" tab are disabled if the active trace has a cartesian format.
  • Page 332 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool ● Assign different colors to limit line segments with disabled limit check. Note: Limit line display and limit check are independent of each other: Hiding the limit line does not switch off the limit check. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle:DISPlay[:STATe] Limit Check...
  • Page 333 ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool Figure 5-5: Simultaneous dB Mag limit line and circle check Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle:FAIL? CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:FAIL:ALL? Clear Test Resets the limit check results. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle:CLEar Draw Circle Activates touchscreen or mouse operation; tap the diagram at one border of the limit circle and draw the circle to the required size and position.

  • Page 334: Display Circle Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool 5.6.4 Display Circle tab The "Display Circle" functionality allows you to limit results in complex trace formats (Smith, Polar) to a user-defined circle. In particular, while the trace format is complex, line and circle limit checks are only performed inside the display circle. Most of the controls on this tab are only active, if the active trace is displayed in a com- plex format.

  • Page 335: Horiz. Line Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Lines softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle[:STATe] Clear Circle Resets the "Display Circle" to its default configuration (unit circle; show border: off; limit to circle: off) Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle:CLEar Draw Circle / Radius, Center X, Center Y Defines the Display Circle – either by drawing it in the diagram area or by providing its radius and center.

  • Page 336: Marker Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool 5.7 Marker softtool The "Marker" softtool allows you to position markers on a trace and to define their properties. Markers are also convenient tools for searching special points on traces and for scaling diagrams. Access: TRACE –...
  • Page 337 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Mkr <i> Stimulus / Ref Mkr Stimulus Gets/sets the stimulus value of the active marker. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:X CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:X Mkr <i> Arb. Response / Ref Mkr Arb. Response Gets/sets the response value (Y position) of an "Arbitrary" marker (see "Marker Mode"...
  • Page 338 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Tip: To disable a single marker, drag it into vertical direction to release it from the trace and drop it onto the "Delete" icon. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:AOFF Delta Mode Enables/disables the "Delta Mode" for the active marker. At the same time, enables the Mkr.

  • Page 339: Marker Props Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool "Coupling Type" Label "All" "Coupled Markers" "Channel" "Coupled Markers in <name of active channel>" "Diagram" "Coupled Markers in <name of active diagram>" Coupling also works if Tracking is enabled for Marker <m> in one trace. The Marker <m>...
  • Page 340 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool "Default" means that the marker is formatted according to the related trace's Dflt Marker Frmt. In "Arbitrary" Marker Mode, if the transformation between trace format and marker for- mat requires a concrete stimulus value, some result values in the marker info field can be unavailable.

  • Page 341: Marker Search Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TYPE CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:TYPE Marker Info Displays the marker coordinates above the marker symbol. Remote command: Ref Mkr -> Mkr Places the reference marker to the position of the active marker. "Ref. Mkr -> Mkr" is not active if the active marker is a reference marker.
  • Page 342 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Background information Refer to "Basic marker search functions" on page 93. 5.7.3.1 Controls on the Marker Search tab Max / Min Sets the active marker to the absolute maximum or minimum in the search range, i.e. to the largest or smallest of all response values.
  • Page 343 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute NPEak CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:EXECute NPEak CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:RESult? CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:RESult? Peak Left / Peak Right Sets the active marker to the next local maximum or minimum to the left or right of the current marker position, depending on the selected Peak Type.
  • Page 344 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:SEARch:TRACking CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:SEARch:TRACking Marker Config... Opens the Marker Config dialog. 5.7.3.2 Search Range dialog The "Search Range" dialog confines the "Marker Search" and "Target Search" for the selected marker to a subrange of the sweep. The search range is a continuous interval of the sweep variable.
  • Page 345 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool The 10 search ranges are valid for the entire recall set. Each of them can be assigned to any marker in the recall set, irrespective of the trace and channel that the marker belongs to. The default search range of any new marker is "Full Span".
  • Page 346 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Access: ● TRACE – [MARKER] > "Marker Search" > "Marker Config..." ● TRACE – [MARKER] > "Multiple Peak" > "Marker Config..." Select Marker Allows you to select the related marker and to activate or deactivate it. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] Search Config...

  • Page 347: Multiple Peak Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:EXCursion CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:EXCursion CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:EXCursion:STATe CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:EXCursion:STATe 5.7.4 Multiple Peak tab "Multiple Peak" search allows you to find multiple local minima/maxima at once. Background information Refer to "Basic marker search functions" on page 93. 5.7.4.1 Controls on the Multiple Peak tab Max / Min Sets up to 10 markers to the highest maxima or lowest minima in the configured...
  • Page 348 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Tracking Enables or disables tracking for "Multiple Peak" search. If enabled, a new multiple peak search is performed for each sweep (creating/deleting markers as needed). Define an Eval Range to restrict the search to the adequate frequency or power inter- val.

  • Page 349: Target Search Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Excursion Settings Defines a minimum excursion for multiple peak searches and activates it. If "Active", only peaks with an excursion above the configured "Excursion" value are considered. By definition, the excursion of a peak is the smaller of the absolute differ- ences in measured values from the adjoining peaks of opposite polarity.
  • Page 350 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Target Format Selects the format that is used to specify the Target Value. The selected target format applies to the current marker only: each marker can have a different target format. The table below gives an overview on how a complex target value z = x + jy is converted.

  • Page 351: Bandfilter Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute LTARget CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:EXECute LTARget CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:RESult? CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:RESult? Search Mode Displays and sets the current marker search mode. Select one of the predefined max, min, peak, or target searches or select "Sweep Pro- gress" to track the position of the sweep cursor. Remote command: CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:EXECute CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:EXECute...
  • Page 352 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool The "Eval Range..." button opens the "Evaluation Range" dialog that allows you to nar- row the "Bandfilter" search to a particular stimulus range. See Evaluation Range dia- log. Bandwidth Specifies the minimum excursion of the bandpass and bandstop peaks. ●...
  • Page 353 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool If "Bandpass Ref to Max" is selected, the analyzer uses (or creates) the four markers "M1" to "M4" to locate the bandpass region. ● "M1" indicates the maximum of the peak ("Max"). ● "M2" indicates the point on the left edge of the peak where the trace value is equal to the maximum minus the bandwidth factor ("Lower Edge").
  • Page 354 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool If "Bandstop Ref to Max" is selected, the analyzer uses (or creates) the four markers "M1" to "M4" to locate the bandstop region. ● "M1" indicates the minimum of the peak ("Min"). ● "M2" indicates the "Lower Edge" of the bandstop, i.e. the point on the left edge of the peak where the trace value is equal to the maximum in the search range (pass- band value) minus the specified Bandwidth.

  • Page 355: Set By Marker Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool ● "Absolute Level:" The bandpass (bandstop) is the tallest (lowest) peak in the search range. To be valid, the peak must be above (below) -"Bandwidth". The Lower Band Edge and Upper Band Edge values are given by the frequencies where the trace is equal to -"Bandwidth".
  • Page 356 ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool Center = Marker / Start = Marker / Stop = Marker / Span = Marker The following functions use the stimulus value of the active marker to define the sweep range. ● "Center = Marker" sets the center of the sweep range equal to the stimulus value of the active marker, leaving the span unchanged.

  • Page 357: Info Field Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Marker softtool A standard application of "Zero Delay at Marker" is correction of the constant delay caused by the interconnecting cables between the analyzer test ports and the DUT (line stretch). Note: "Zero Delay at Marker" modifies the "Offset" parameters and therefore influen- ces the entire channel.

  • Page 358: Stimulus Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Stimulus softtool Coupled Markers Activates or deactivates Marker coupling. The label indicates the selected Coupling Type: "Coupling Type" Label "All" "Coupled Markers" "Channel" "Coupled Markers in <name of active channel>" "Diagram" "Coupled Markers in <name of active diagram>" Coupling also works if Tracking is enabled for Marker <m>...

  • Page 359: Stimulus Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Stimulus softtool ● While in Cartesian diagrams the x-axis represents the stimulus values, in polar and Smith diagrams this direct relation is lost. In any case, a marker can be used to dis- play the stimulus value of a given trace point. For "Time Domain"...

  • Page 360: Power Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Stimulus softtool For a Log Freq only "Start Frequency" and "Stop Frequency" can be set. Note: For segmented frequency sweeps the start and stop frequencies and the num- ber of sweep points are defined per segment. See Chapter 5.10.2.2, "Define Segments dialog", on page 374.

  • Page 361: Time Domain Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Stimulus softtool 5.8.2.1 Controls on the Power tab Power Determines the output power at the test ports for the sweep types "Lin Freq", "Log Freq", "CW Mode", and "Time". Also determines the default output power for "Segmen- ted"...
  • Page 362 ® GUI reference R&S Stimulus softtool Figure 5-6: Stimulus > Time Domain X-Axis softtool tab left = Time representation right = Distance representation Time Start / Time Stop / Time Center / Time Span Defines the display range for the time domain trace in time representation (see "...

  • Page 363: Power Bw Avg Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Power Bw Avg softtool "Distance Start" and "Distance Stop" or "Distance Center" and "Distance Span" are alternative settings. Remote command: n.a. Time Start / Time Stop / Time Center / Time Span. Time / Distance "Time" and "Distance" switch over between the x-axis scaling in time units or distance units.

  • Page 364: Power Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Power Bw Avg softtool 5.9.1 Power tab The "Power" tab allows you to configure the signal power. It is identical to the "Stimu- lus" > "Power" tab; see Chapter 5.8.2, "Power tab", on page 360. 5.9.2 Bandwidth tab Sets the measurement bandwidth for the active channel A system error correction (calibration) remains valid when the filter settings are changed.

  • Page 365: Average Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Power Bw Avg softtool 5.9.3 Average tab Defines the number of consecutive sweeps to be averaged and enables/disables the sweep average. Effects of sweep averaging, alternative settings An average over several sweeps reduces the influence of random effects in the mea- surement and therefore minimizes the noise level.

  • Page 366: Sweep Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Mode Selects one of the following averaging algorithms: ● "Auto": Automatic selection between "Reduce Noise" and "Flatten Noise" mode, depending on the trace type. ● "Reduce Noise": Cumulative moving averages of the real and imaginary parts of each measurement result, provides the most effective noise suppression for the "Real"...
  • Page 367 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Number of Points Sets the total number of measurement points per sweep. The minimum number of points is 1 (measurement at a single frequency/power/time value), the maximum is 20,001. Together with the sweep range defined in the Stimulus tab of the "Stimulus"...
  • Page 368 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool ● If the sweep range is defined via "Center Frequency" and "Span Frequency", both the "Span Frequency" value and the "Number of Points" can vary as the "Freq Step Size" is changed. The "Span Frequency" is reduced as little as possible so that the condition "Freq Step Size"...

  • Page 369: Sweep Type Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Tip: A delay time before the start of each partial measurement increases the accuracy, in particular for measurements on DUTs with long settling times (e.g. quartz oscillators, SAW filters). Select "First Partial Meas'ment" if the DUT does not require an additional settling time due to the interchange of source and receive ports.
  • Page 370 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE LINear Log Freq In a "Log Freq" sweep, the stimulus frequency is swept on a logarithmic scale over the continuous frequency range. The frequency range (sweep range) and the internal gen- erator power can be specified in the "Stimulus"...
  • Page 371 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Sweep segments can overlap. The segment list must contain at least 2 distinct fre- quency points before a segmented frequency sweep can be started. Instrument settings such as the internal generator power, the measurement (IF) band- width, and the frequency band of the local oscillator can be set independently for the individual segments.
  • Page 372 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Any generator power calibration is included. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE POWer CW Mode "CW Mode" sweeps, like Time sweeps, are performed at constant frequency and stim- ulus power, which can be specified in the "Stimulus" settings (see Chapter 5.8.1, "Stim- ulus tab",...
  • Page 373 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Time "Time" sweeps, like CW Mode sweeps, are performed at constant frequency and stim- ulus power, which can be specified in the "Stimulus" settings (see Chapter 5.8.1, "Stim- ulus tab", on page 359). A single sweep extends over a specified period of time, defined via the "Stop Time"...
  • Page 374 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool ● In "Point based" mode, the x-axis shows all sweep points with equal spacings. Gaps between sweep segments are minimized; no diagram space is "wasted" on unused frequency ranges. Point-based mode is indicated in the channel line. The example below shows a segmented frequency sweep with two segments.
  • Page 375 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool ● Sweep segments are allowed to overlap. ● In contrast to standard frequency sweeps, the start and stop frequency in a sweep segment do not have to be different. So with a segmented sweep you can measure n points at frequency f (in segment 1), n...
  • Page 376 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STARt [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:STOP [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:CENTer? [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:FREQuency:SPAN? [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:SWEep:POINts Add / Insert / Delete / Delete All The four buttons below the segment list extend or shorten the list. ● "Add" adds a new segment to the end of the list. The added segment covers a possible frequency gap between the preceding seg- ment and the upper frequency limit of the analyzer.
  • Page 377 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Import.../ Export... The buttons open standard dialogs to import/export sweep segment settings to/from an ASCII file (*.SegList). ● "Import..." replaces the current segment list by a sweep segment list loaded from a *.SegList file. ●...
  • Page 378 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Related information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 5.10.2.2, "Define Segments dialog", on page 374 ● "Show Point List..." on page 376 Optional Columns Each selected (checked) option adds a column to the segment list and the point list. ●...

  • Page 379: Trigger Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool rent measurement settings, the "Meas Delay" is 0 s. The segment sweep time and point delay values are maintained until changed explicitly if "Auto" is switched off. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent:POWer[:LEVel]:CONTrol [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:POWer[:LEVel] [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:BWIDth[:RESolution]:CONTrol [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:BWIDth[:RESolution] [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:DEFine [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:DEFine:SELect [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:INSert [SENSe<Ch>:]SEGMent<Seg>:INSert:SELect...
  • Page 380 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool 5.10.3.1 Controls on the Trigger tab The trigger settings are also valid for calibration sweeps. Hence, in external trigger mode, the external trigger signal must be available during the system error correction, too. To start the calibration sweeps without delay, use the "FreeRun" trigger type. The following buttons in the "Trigger"...
  • Page 381 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool ● If "Multiple Triggers" is active, the trigger sources for different triggered measure- ment sequences, the trigger slope, and the trigger delay can be selected individu- ally using the Trigger Manager dialog. In particular, it is possible to use different external trigger sources. Remote command: TRIGger<Ch>[:SEQuence]:SOURce EXTernal Manual Trigger...
  • Page 382 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Remote command: TRIGger<Ch>[:SEQuence]:LINK Delay Specifies a delay time between the trigger event and the start of the next measurement sequence. The specified "Delay" must be zero or positive, so that the trigger event precedes the start of the measurement (post-trigger).
  • Page 383 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Figure 5-8: Example of a multiple trigger configuration The table in the "Trigger Manager" dialog contains several editable (white) or non-edit- able (gray) columns. All settings are analogous to the general trigger settings in the Trigger tab.

  • Page 384: Sweep Control Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Remote command: TRIGger<Ch>[:SEQuence]:MULTiple:SOURce TRIGger<Ch>[:SEQuence]:MULTiple:SLOPe<Num> TRIGger<Ch>[:SEQuence]:MULTiple:HOLDoff 5.10.4 Sweep Control tab Allows you to control the sweep execution. The availability of certain settings depends on the selected Remote Language. 5.10.4.1 Controls on the Sweep Control tab Continuous / Single Activate either continuous (default) or single sweep mode.
  • Page 385 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Restart Sweep initiates a new measurement cycle. For the DEFAULT Remote Language, this setting applies to the active channel only. All Channels Continuous/All Channels on Hold to select a common sweep mode for all channels. For remote languages other than DEFAULT, this setting applies to all channels.
  • Page 386 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Remote command: INITiate<Ch>[:IMMediate][:DUMMy] INITiate[:IMMediate]:ALL Restart Manager... Opens the Restart Manager dialog. All Channels Continuous/All Channels on Hold Selects a common sweep mode for all channels of the active recall set. ● "All Channels Continuous": all channels are set to "Continuous" sweep mode ●...
  • Page 387 ® GUI reference R&S Sweep Softtool Pipelining Allows you to activate pipelining of measurement data for alternated Driving Mode. See Chapter 4.1.4.2, "Pipelining of measurement data", on page 78. Remote command: INITiate:PIPelining:STATe (CALCulate:PIPelining:DATA?) 5.10.4.2 Restart Manager dialog The "Restart Manager" dialog defines the Restart Sweep behavior in "Single"...

  • Page 388: Cal Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Sweep Active Channel/Sweeps (table) If you select "Sweep Active Channel", then in single sweep mode Restart Sweep only restarts the sweep in the active channel. The "Sweeps" column reflects the Sweeps settings of the individual channels. Remote command: INITiate<Ch>[:IMMediate]:SCOPe SINGle...
  • Page 389 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool left = bidirectional R&S ZND right = unidirectional R&S ZND ● The "Start Auto Cal" and "Start... (Cal Unit)" buttons are only active if a calibration unit is connected to the analyzer. For a unidirectional R&S ZND, "Start Auto Cal" is not supported and hence this but- ton is hidden.
  • Page 390 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool ● "Active Channel" if you only want to calibrate the active channel ● "All Channels" if you want to calibrate all channels in the current recall set ● "Selected Channels" if you want to calibrate only certain channels 5.11.1.3 Calibration Unit wizard The "Calibration Unit"...
  • Page 391 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool ● A successful calibration supersedes the previous calibration, discarding all previ- ous system error correction data. To keep older correction data, you can transfer them to the calibration "Pool" using Calibration Manager dialog. ● The system error correction data that are determined in a calibration procedure, are stored in the analyzer.
  • Page 392 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Figure 5-10: Calibration Unit wizard, step 1: Ports (Inline Calibration System) Figure 5-11: Calibration Unit wizard, step 1: Ports (> 4 test ports) Ports Selects the test ports to be calibrated. Note: Calibration and port de-/activation. User Manual 1173.9557.02 ─...
  • Page 393 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool The analyzer fimware automatically activates/deactivates ports during/after a (success- ful) calibration: ● Calibrated ports that were previously disabled, are automatically enabled as single- ended logical ports. ● An uncalibrated port that is not used by a measurement (i.e. the port is not required by any trace of the related channel) is disabled.
  • Page 394 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Query further cal unit properties: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:DATE? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:FRANge? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:PORTs? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:WARMup[:STATe]? Temperature Compensation Available for inline calibration systems (ICS) only. Applies to all inline calibration units (ICUs) that are connected to the ICS and that are used with factory characterization data.
  • Page 395 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Select All/Deselect All Selects/deselects all ports. These buttons are only shown if more than 4 ports are available. Next Proceeds to Step 2: Connections. "Next" is unavailable (and a warning is displayed) if the following happens: ●...
  • Page 396 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Figure 5-13: Calibration Unit wizard, step 2: Connections (>4 test ports and multiple port assign- ments) If multiple port assignments are required and "Use Reduced Number of Through" on page 556 is enabled, make sure that each port assignment contains the Common Port.
  • Page 397 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Step 3: Cal Unit During the calibration phase, the R&S ZND displays a "Cal Unit" screen that guides the user through the actual correction data acquisition. In each calibration step ● the calibration unit must be connected according to the depicted port assignment; auto-detection is possible ●...
  • Page 398 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Figure 5-14: Automatic calibration: inline calibration system Calibration Sweep Diagrams During the calibration sweep, each diagram contains a single S-parameter trace and a typical result trace for the measured calibration standard. If switch matrices are involved, a sweep is performed for every possible signal path and for each of these paths a separate S-parameter trace is shown (see Chap- ter 4.7.20.5, "Multiple paths and...
  • Page 399 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Detect Port Assignment Starts a procedure by which the R&S ZND (with a little help from the attached calibra- tion unit) auto-detects the connected ports. The automatic assignment replaces the configured one. In case auto-detection fails ●...
  • Page 400 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Access: CHANNEL – [CAL] > "Start Cal" > Calibration – "Start... (Manual)" The wizard proceeds through the following steps: 1. "Ports and Type": Select the ports you want to calibrate and the calibration type you want to use.
  • Page 401 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool For a unidirectional R&S ZND (see Chapter 4.1.4.3, "R&S ZND: unidirectional vs. bidir- ectional operation", on page 79), only port 1 can operate as source port. Hence the "Source" selector is disabled and bidirectional calibrations such as Trans Norm Both, TOSM, UOSM are not available.
  • Page 402 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Type/Source Selects the calibration type. The green arrow symbols give a preview of the type and the number of calibration sweeps involved: ● Curved arrows (example: "Refl Norm Open") denote one or more reflection mea- surements at each port.
  • Page 403 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Messages in the dialog An information message (or error message) is displayed if one of the following hap- pens: ● One of the selected calibration kits is described by ideal kit parameters or typical values.
  • Page 404 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection<PhyPt> [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SCONnection<PhyPt> [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:CATalog? [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:DELete Cal Kit Selects a cal kit for the connector at each selected physical port. The drop-down list contains all available calibration kits for the selected connector type. The assignment of a calibration kit to a connector type must be the same for all physi- cal ports: If a calibration kit is changed, the R&S ZND automatically assigns the new kit to all ports with the same connector type.
  • Page 405 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Figure 5-16: Calibration Setting Wizard, Step 3: Calibration In the upper part of the "Calibration" screen, the R&S ZND shows the sweep diagrams for the currently measured S-parameter. The lower part displays the calibrated ports and standards and visualizes the measurement progress.
  • Page 406 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool The purpose of the typical result traces "Trc1"" and "Trc2" is to avoid connection errors and to track hardware problems: if the correct standard type is measured, and every- thing is properly connected, then the measured traces are expected to be similar to the typical trace.
  • Page 407 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool A green checkmark indicates that the calibration data of a standard has been acquired successfully. A green checkmark after the port symbol indicates that the minimum number of calibration measurements for the port has been performed. Tip: ●...
  • Page 408 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool [SENSe<Chn>:]CORRection:SSTate? [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:STIMulus? 5.11.1.5 Power Cal wizard The "Power Cal" wizard displays a single screen, showing the current source and receive ports. It allows you to perform "Ref. Receiver", "Meas. Receiver" and scalar source power ("Source Flatness") calibrations, based on the current power calibration settings (see Chapter 5.11.3, "Power Cal Settings tab",...
  • Page 409 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool After a successful power calibration, the trace "a<m>(P<m>)" must be close to the "Cal Power". During a measurement receiver calibration ("Meas. Receiver"), the following traces are displayed: ● The trace "a<m>(P<m>)" shows the (previously calibrated) power at the calibrated reference plane (source port P<m>).
  • Page 410 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Apply Is enabled when a new set of power calibration data has been acquired. The button applies all available power calibrations to the active channel, aborts the verification sweeps, and closes the port overview section. The power calibration state is indicated in the trace list, see Chapter 4.5.6.3, "Power calibration...
  • Page 411 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Start Cal Sweep Starts the calibration sweeps for the selected port and power calibration settings and closes the dialog. The calibration is performed as described in "Calibration procedure" on page 177. Open the Power Cal Settings tab if you wish to modify the calibration procedure.
  • Page 412 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool left: = source and meas. port identical right = source and meas. port different Port Overview The dialog shows all receiver ports of the network analyzer. The selected port is dis- played with the current cal power settings (see Chapter 5.11.3.2, "Cal Power Config dialog", on page 432);...
  • Page 413 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool left = "Ref. Receiver" Pwr Cal Method right = "Power Meter" Pwr Cal Method Start Cal Sweep Start the calibration sweeps for the selected port and power calibration settings and close the dialog. The calibration is performed as described in "Calibration procedure"...
  • Page 414 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Use "Detect Port Assignment" to detect the current port assignment (after reconnecting the calibration unit). Manual port assignment is not supported. Validate Runs the validation for the current port assignment. The validation proceeds through the connected ports cal unit ports p ∈...
  • Page 415 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Use "Detect Port Assignment" to detect the current port assignment (after reconnecting the calibration unit). Measurement Selects the measurement to be performed in advanced mode and runs it Characterization Selects the calibration unit characterization to be used for the validation. By default the factory characterization is used.

  • Page 416: Cal Devices Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Unchecking "Auto Scale" prevents the traces from scaling as the measurement and/or standard changes. Unchecking "Average On" turns off averaging. "Format" selects the trace format for the limit check (see "Validation Limits" on page 415). Remote command: CALCulate:CALValidate:AVERage[:STATe] CALCulate:CALValidate:FORMat...
  • Page 417 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool The list shows the available connector types with their name ("Conn. Type") and polar- ity ("Sexless"). The remaining columns in the list are described below. Storing connector type settings Calibration kits and connector types are global resources; the parameters are stored independently and available for all recall sets.
  • Page 418 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Line Type / Rel. Permittivity εr / Cutoff Freq. fc "Line Type" describes the wave propagation mode (offset model) in the transmission lines of the standards associated with the connector type. ● If the calibration kit standards contain lines with transverse electric propagation mode (TEM, e.g.
  • Page 419 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool 5.11.2.2 Calibration Kits dialog The "Calibration Kits" dialog shows the available calibration kits for the different con- nector types. It is also used for cal kit and cal kit file management. Access: CHANNEL – [CAL] > "Cal Devices" > "Cal Kits..." Related information Refer to the following sections: ●...
  • Page 420 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Connector Type The "Connector Type" table displays the available cal kit connector types. Select a row in this table to get the list of Available Cal Kits. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:CATalog? Available Cal Kits Displays the cal kits for the selected Connector Type Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:CATalog?
  • Page 421 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Related information Refer to the following sections: ● Chapter 4.5.2.4, "Cal kit Files", on page 162 ● Chapter 5.11.2.2, "Calibration Kits dialog", on page 419 ● Chapter 4.5.2.1, "Calibration standard types", on page 158 Access: Calibration Kits dialog >...
  • Page 422 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool R&S ZND can calculate the S-parameters. See "Read .s1p File... / Read .s2p File... /" on page 422 and "View / Modify Cal Kit Standards dialog" on page 423. ● "Port" defines whether the standard can be connected to any analyzer port or to just one port (for one-port standards) or a pair of ports (for two-port standards).
  • Page 423 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool View / Modify Cal Kit Standards dialog The "View / Modify Cal Kit Standards" dialog shows the circuit model for a selected cal- ibration standard. It is also used to define or edit the circuit model (offset and load) parameters for a user-defined standard.
  • Page 424 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Both parameter sets are closely related. The "Electrical Length" is proportional to the "Delay"; "Z0" corresponds to the "Char. Imp.". Moreover the analyzer converts a Key- sight-type "Offset Loss" into a R&S ZVR-type "Loss" and vice versa using the "Rel. Permittivity εr"...
  • Page 425 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Controls in the Characterize Cal Unit dialog Calibration Unit Displays the connected calibration units. The R&S ZND auto-detects all calibration units which are connected to one of its USB ports. If several cal units are connected, one of them must be selected for characterization (active cal unit).
  • Page 426 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool The properties of the selected characterization are shown below the list. "Delete" dele- tes the selected characterization file; "Start Characterization..." opens the Characteri- zation wizard to create a characterization. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:CKIT:CATalog? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:CKIT:STANdard:CATalog? SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:SDATa? Characterization wizard The "Characterization"...
  • Page 427 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Figure 5-18: Characterization of inline calibration units Test Port Assignment Defines the assignment between test ports and cal unit ports. In the default "Manual" assignment, VNA ports and cal unit port numbers match. If you decide to use a differ- ent assignment, you can auto-detect the actual assignment ("Automatic") or select the analyzer port numbers manually.
  • Page 428 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs:CONNection? [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CKIT:PORTs Take OSM / Take All OSM and Through "Take OSM" starts a calibration sweep for the related port. "Take All OSM and Through" initiates a series of calibration sweeps; the R&S ZND acquires a full set of one-port and two-port data.

  • Page 429: Power Cal Settings Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Save File to SD Card For all calibration units, characterization data can be saved to the calibration unit's internal flash memory. For some calibration units (e.g. the new models R&S ZN-Z5x and R&S ZN-Z15x), they can also be saved to an SD card inserted at the calibration unit.
  • Page 430 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool 5.11.3.1 Controls on the Power Cal Settings tab Some buttons serve as openers for additional dialogs: ● "Cal Power...": see Chapter 5.11.3.2, "Cal Power Config dialog", on page 432 ● "Transm. Coefficients...": see Chapter 5.11.3.3, "Power Meter Transmission Coeffi- cients dialog", on page 434...
  • Page 431 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Remote command: SOURce:POWer:CORRection:COLLect:AVERage:NTOLerance Flatness Cal – Convergence Modifies the amount of power correction for each of the flatness calibration sweeps. The power correction in each sweep, as controlled by the calibrated reference receiver (a-wave receiver), is multiplied by the selected convergence factor. With a conver- gence factor larger (smaller) than 1, the source power correction after each flatness calibration step is larger (smaller) than the measured deviation from the desired power.
  • Page 432 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool 5.11.3.2 Cal Power Config dialog The "Cal Power Config" dialog adjusts the target power for the power calibration (cal power) and defines the target power for the reference receiver calibration. These set- tings are particularly important for test setups involving external attenuators or amplifi- ers.
  • Page 433 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Port Power Offset ← Port Cal Power Defines a port-specific offset to the Channel Base Power The actual output power at the port is equal to the "Channel Base Power" plus the "Port Power Offset". If P is selected as "Channel Base Power", then for a power sweep the actual port power varies across the sweep.
  • Page 434 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool 5.11.3.3 Power Meter Transmission Coefficients dialog The power calibration is taken at another reference plane compared to the system error correction. This happens, e.g., in on-wafer measurements, but also at more trivial things like using a simple attenuator to connect the power meter to the measurement system.
  • Page 435 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Access: Power Meter Transmission Coefficients dialog > "Two Port Config..." Frequency / Transm. Coefficients: Insert, Delete, Delete All The required two-port information is a list of transmission coefficients at different fre- quency values (power loss list). The buttons in the dialog provide different ways of cre- ating and modifying the list.

  • Page 436: Use Cal Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Recall... / Save... You can save the displayed power loss list to a power meter correction list file with extension (*.pmcl) and reload it in later sessions. Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:CORRection:TCOefficient<Ch> MMEMory:STORe:CORRection:TCOefficient<Ch> 5.11.4 Use Cal tab Provides access to functions for activating, deactivating and managing calibrations.
  • Page 437 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Scalar Power Cal – All Power Cals On / All Power Cals Off Activates or deactivates all scalar power calibrations in the active channel. "All Power Cals On" is only available if a valid power calibration is available for the active channel, but not active;...
  • Page 438 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool All possible power calibrations can be performed from the Power Cal wizard. Port Overview Shows all source ports together with their possible power calibrations. Unavailable cali- brations (i.e. calibrations that have not been performed yet) are grayed out. Note: For a unidirectional R&S ZND (see Chapter 4.1.4.3, "R&S ZND: unidirectional vs.
  • Page 439 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool Channel State The "Channel State" table shows all channels in the active recall set together with their current calibration. Channels can use either the active channel calibration (if available), a previously stored user correction data or the factory system error correction (indica- ted as '--').
  • Page 440 ® GUI reference R&S Cal softtool For channels that are linked to a "Cal Group" (using "Apply" or "Apply to All"), a new calibration overwrites the cal group data and hence affects all channels that are also linked to this cal group. An "Overwrite Warning" is displayed in this case. To continue with the calibration, confirm by using button "Overwrite Current File?"...

  • Page 441: Channel Config Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Ch<n> Calibration Properties/Cal Group <n> Properties Displays the basic channel settings and the properties of the system error correction and the power correction for the channel (calibration group) selected in the "Channel State" ("Pool") table. In addition, it is stated whether sweep data are available for the selected calibration.

  • Page 442: Channels Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Access: CHANNEL – [CHANNEL CONFIG] hardkey 5.12.1 Channels tab Allows you to create and delete channels, to modify the channel state, and to select a channel as the active channel. You can monitor the channel activity using the com- OUTPut<Ch>:UPORt[:VALue] mand and the output signals at pins 8 to 11 of the USER PORT connector.
  • Page 443 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool The order of all channels in a recall set is given by the channels' creation time. By default, the channels are named Ch1, Ch2, ... so that Ch<n – 1> precedes Ch<n>. This order is always maintained, even if channels are renamed, invisible (because no traces are assigned to them) or distributed over several diagram areas.
  • Page 444 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Copy Channel + Diagram Copies the active channel with all its settings (including a possible channel calibration) and traces, and displays the created traces in a new diagram area. The new channel is named Ch<n>, where <n> is the largest of all existing channel numbers plus one.
  • Page 445 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:FSIMulator[:STATe] 5.12.1.2 Channel Manager dialog The "Channel Manager" dialog allows you to rename channels and to change their measurement state and sweep mode. Access: CHANNEL – [CHANNEL CONFIG] > "Channels" > "Channel Manager..." Background information Refer to Chapter 4.1.3.3, "Active and inactive traces and...

  • Page 446: Port Config Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool 5.12.2 Port Config tab Configures the ports of the R&S ZND. 5.12.2.1 Controls on the Port Config tab If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 444), the "Balanced Ports..." button is inactive (grayed out). Port Settings...
  • Page 447 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool RF Off tab In the "Source RF Off" column of the "RF Off" tab, you can switch the RF power off the respective physical VNA port off or on. Arbitrary Power tab Configures the source ports of the R&S ZND for port-specific powers. Channel base power After a Reset, all source port powers are set to the channel base power P .
  • Page 448 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Cal Power Config dialog The "Cal Power Config" dialog allows you to define port-specific source powers, which can be necessary to ensure a definite signal power at the inputs of the DUT. Access: Port Settings dialog >...
  • Page 449 ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Edit Stimulus For non-segmented sweeps, the "Edit Stimulus..." button opens the Stimulus dialog that allows you to access the stimulus settings without having to leave the "Port Set- tings" dialog. Apply / OK / Cancel Modified "Port Settings"...

  • Page 450: Mode Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Channel Config softtool Table 5-3: Parameters for frequency sweeps Lin/Log Freq Sweep CW Mode Sweep Time Sweep Enter & Display Start – – Stop – – Power Number of Sweep Points Enter & Display The "Enter & Display" combo boxes in the "Frequency Sweep" and "Power Sweep" sections of the "Stimulus"...

  • Page 451: Offset Embed Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool ● In "Block Alternated" mode, you can split the sweep range into several blocks of sweep points. The measurement then proceeds block per block, using the "Alterna- ted" driving mode for each block. ●...
  • Page 452 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Access: CHANNEL – [OFFSET EMBED] 5.13.1.1 Overview panel Shows an overview of the overall calculation flow and provides quick access to the "Offset Embed" functions. Access: CHANNEL – [OFFSET EMBED] > "Overview" Figure 5-22: Offset Embed dock widget: Overview (Calculation Flow) Use one of the buttons to configure the corresponding function.
  • Page 453 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Active The checkbox in the "Active" column activates/deactivates the configured length and loss parameters for the respective Port (i.e. adds/removes them to/from the calculation flow) without changing the parameter values. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:OFFSet<PhyPt>:COMPensation[:STATe] Loss at DC / Loss at 1st Freq / 1st Freq for Loss / Use 2nd Freq / Loss at 2nd Freq / 2nd Freq for Loss Defines the one-way loss parameters of the transmission line at the selected port.
  • Page 454 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool All Offsets On / All Offsets Off Activates/deactivates the length and loss compensation for all ports. Use the checkboxes in the Active column to activate/deactivate the length and loss compensation for selected ports. Remote command: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:OFFSet<PhyPt>:COMPensation[:STATe] Displayed Columns...
  • Page 455 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool File Name 1 / Swap Gates The ellipsis button in the "File Name 1" column is enabled as long as the "2-Port Data" network is selected (see Single Ended tab). This network is defined by its S-parame- ters stored in a two-port Touchstone file (*.s2p).
  • Page 456 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Use the controls on the right-hand side of the dialog to define the port set and the order of the ports within the port set. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: DEFine CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PSET:DEEMbedding<ListId>: DEFine CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding:DELete CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:DEFine CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PSET:EMBedding<ListId>:DEFine CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:DELete Active...
  • Page 457 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Note: The loaded file is stored in the active recall set. Persisted recall sets contain the full (de-)embedding data so that they can be transferred to other instruments. Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId> MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId> 5.13.1.5 Balanced panel This panel allows you to activate or deactivate deembedding/embedding of balanced ports.
  • Page 458 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>[: STATe] CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>[: STATe] File Name <i>/Inc. Seq. <i>/Swap Gates <i> The ellipsis button in the "File Name <i>" column is enabled as long as the selected Balanced tab comprises a two-port or four-port data network (*.s2p or *.s4p file). When loading a touchstone file, the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side).
  • Page 459 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool This panel can also be activated by selecting the Ground Loop tab softtool tab. Refer to its description for background information, parameters and additional remote com- mands. Active The checkboxes in the "Active" column activate or deactivate the configured ground loop deembedding/embedding (i.e.
  • Page 460 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool "Active" "Use Default" ☑ ☐ ☐ ☑ 5.13.1.8 Differential Match panel This panel allows you to activate or deactivate differential match embedding. Access: Overview panel > "Differential Match" For the "2-Port Data" network type, the required touchstone file can also be selected from here ("...").

  • Page 461: Offset Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool 5.13.2 Offset tab Defines length offset parameters for each port. Use the complementary dock widget to activate or deactivate length/loss compensation for selected ports (see Chapter 5.13.1.2, "Offset panel", on page 452). The marker function Zero Delay at Marker function overwrites the offset parameters.
  • Page 462 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Port Physical test port of the analyzer. You can define independent offset parameters for all ports. Remote command: The <PhyPt> numeric suffix in the [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:... commands identifies the physical port. Delay / Electrical Length / Mech. Length Defines the length offset at the selected port as a delay, an electrical length, or a mechanical length.
  • Page 463 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool left = no delay right = delay 1 ns The position of the time gate is always relative to the end of the offset transmission line. As a consequence, "Adjust Time Gate" allows measurements at variable offset but fixed time gate position.
  • Page 464 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool If "Delay" is the selected trace format, the entire trace is shifted in vertical direction and centered on zero. In phase format, the "Auto Length" corrected trace shows the devia- tion from linear phase. Evaluation Range...
  • Page 465 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Ports Selects the ports for whom fixture compensation data shall be acquired. Note: For a unidirectional R&S ZND (see Chapter 4.1.4.3, "R&S ZND: unidirectional vs. bidirectional operation", on page 79) port 2 cannot be used as source port and hence P2 is hidden in this dialog.
  • Page 466 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Measurement Type The "Open" , "Short", and "Open and Short" buttons bring up the "Measure Fixture wiz- ard" dialog that guides you through the actual fixture measurement. See "Open/Short vs. Open and Short compensation" on page 186.

  • Page 467: One Way Loss Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Table 5-4: Direct Compensation data Prompt for Each Port File Type Description disabled One csv trace file per standard, containing reflection traces for all selected ports; see Chap- ter 4.4.2.2, "ASCII (*.csv) files", on page 142 enabled One 1-port Touchstone file per...
  • Page 468 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Overview "Overview" on page 461. Port Physical test port of the analyzer. You can define independent loss parameters for all ports. Remote command: The <PhyPt> numeric suffix in the [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:... commands identifies the physical port. Loss at DC / Loss at 1st Freq / 1st Freq for Loss "Loss at DC / Loss at 1st Freq / 1st Freq for Loss / Use 2nd Freq / Loss at 2nd Freq / 2nd Freq for Loss"...

  • Page 469: Single Ended Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Evaluation Range... The "Evaluation Range..." button opens the Evaluation Range dialog that allows you to restrict the frequency range of auto length (and loss) calculations. 5.13.4 Single Ended tab Allows you to specify 2-port deembedding/embedding networks for each physical port. Such a network is either defined: ●...
  • Page 470 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Overview "Overview" on page 461. Type Switches between "Deembedding" and "Embedding" network definition. Port Physical port. The transformation networks are defined such that the analyzer is con- nected to the left of the circuit while the DUT is connected to the right side. You can define independent transformation networks for all ports.

  • Page 471: Fixture Modeling Dialog

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>[: STATe] CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: TNDefinition CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:C<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:G<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:L<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:R<Cmp> Select File... "Select File..." is enabled as long as the "2-Port Data" network is selected. This net- work is defined by its S-parameters stored in a two-port Touchstone file (*.s2p). No additional parameters are required.
  • Page 472 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Supported fixture modeling tools The following fixture modeling tools are supported: ● Chapter 4.7.8, "Eazy de-embedding based on IEEE 370", on page 212 ● Chapter 4.7.9, "In-situ de-embedding", on page 214 ● Chapter 4.7.10, "Smart fixture de-embedding", on page 214 Access: CHANNEL –...
  • Page 473 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-29: Fixture modeling dialog: EZD - Single Ended Ports The fixture modeling proceeds in the following steps: 1. Measure one or more test coupons for the related fixture; see Chapter 5.13.5.2, "Measure Coupon", on page 475 The tools differ in the available coupon types.
  • Page 474 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Output Settings Allows you to specify the directory where the fixture modeling tools store their data. Default is C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\Embedding. If "Timestamp Filenames" is checked, the names of subsequently generated "Test Cou- pon" and "DUT + Test Fixture" files are prefixed with the current date and time. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory:DEFault...
  • Page 475 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Applies the calculated deembedding files <...>_left_DUT.sNp and <...>_right_DUT.sNp) to the ports marked "Active" in the Save Fixture Model sec- tion. Remote command: MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt> MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt> Cancel Closes the dialog without applying any deembedding files. 5.13.5.2 Measure Coupon The "Measure Coupon"...
  • Page 476 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool The display area shows all the S parameter measurements being made. The resulting Touchstone file is written to C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\Embed- ding. Coupon Type "1x Open, 1x Short" (ISD only) the measurement proceeds in two steps: one for the "1x Open"...
  • Page 477 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Load File Load DUT + test fixture data from file Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:DUT:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:DUT:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:DUT:MEASure:FILename CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar Measure Starts the measurement of DUT + test fixture at the Active ports. The display area shows all the S parameter measurements being made. The resulting Touchstone file is written to C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\Embed- ding.
  • Page 478 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-30: Save Fixture Model section left = single-ended right = balanced Run <Fixture Modeling Tool> Runs the selected fixure deembedding tool. This button is only active, if both: ● the test coupon measurement finished successfully or the test coupon data were successfully loaded from file (see Chapter 5.13.5.2, "Measure Coupon",...
  • Page 479 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Apply Use these checkboxes to indicate the ports (physical for single-ended deembedding, logical for balanced deembedding) to which the deembedding files (generated by <Fixture Modeling Tool>) shall be assigned when the dialog is closed using Apply. Note: For a "left"...
  • Page 480 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-32: Delta-L error messages 5.13.5.6 ISD Advanced Settings Advanced settings of the ISD tool. For details, see the ISD User Guide. For the analyzer firmware, these settings are global. User Manual 1173.9557.02 ─ 63...
  • Page 481 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Test Coupons > Insertion Loss Tells the ISD tool about the linearity of the 2xThru test coupon: ● "Linear": Linear insertion loss ● "Non-Linear" (default): Non-linear insertion loss ● "Resonant": The 2x Thru test coupon is split and used directly for deembedding This option can be more accurate if the fixture and the 2x Thru have the same impedance at every location.
  • Page 482 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool ● "Odd on left" (default): 1, 3, 5, etc. are on the left and ports 2, 4, 6, etc. are on the right. ● "All on left": All ports are on the left Note: Ports on the left/right are assumed to be coupled (if Trace Coupling is not set to...
  • Page 483 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool ● "Weak": Coupling is extracted even if there are 2 ports enabled on the test coupon ● "Strong" (default): If the test coupon is a 4-port file, and there are two ports to be extracted, the ISD tool optimizes odd- and even-mode insertion losses.
  • Page 484 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool 2x Thru Port Ordering Tells the SFD tool about the port ordering of the 2x Thru test coupon ● "Ports 1&3 on Left" (default): Odd ports are on the left and even ports are on the right ●...
  • Page 485 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Port Order Tells the EZD tool about the port ordering of the test coupon ● "Odd on left" (default): Odd ports are on the left and even ports are on the right ● "1 to N on left"...

  • Page 486: Port Sets Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool 5.13.6 Port Sets tab Selects transformation networks for deembedding/embedding arbitrary port sets, defines their parameters, assigns them to a port set and enables embedding. Use the complementary dock widget to create the required port sets and to activate or deactivate dembedding/embedding for selected port sets (see Chapter 5.13.1.4, "Port Sets...
  • Page 487 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Remote command: The port set number corresponds to the <ListId> numeric suffix in the port set de-/ embedding commands; see e.g. CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir: DEEMbedding<ListId>[:STATe]. All Deembedding Activated Deactivates or activates all deembeddings (single-ended, balanced, port set, ground loop) for the active channel, if any.

  • Page 488: Balanced Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool D1, D2 The "D1" (and "D2") buttons are enabled as long as the selected deembedding/embed- ding network is defined using Touchstone files. When loading a touchstone file, the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side).
  • Page 489 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-33: Offset Embed > Balanced softtool left = 4 port data file selected for de-/embedding right = other network selected for de-/embedding If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator"...
  • Page 490 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Remote command: n.a. Network The graphical list contains all available 4-port networks (see Chapter 4.6.2.4, "Circuit models for 4-port networks", on page 191). symbol selects "no network" and disables deembedding/embedding for the selected balanced port. The 4-port data network (symbol "D1"...

  • Page 491: Ground Loop Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool When loading a touchstone file, the analyzer by default assumes odd ports left (VNA side), even ports right (DUT side). However, it is also possible to instruct the analyzer to assume an "Increasing Port Sequence", i.e. that the low port numbers are on the VNA side.
  • Page 492 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 444), this tab is inactive, i.e. all controls except the "Overview" button are grayed out. Overview "Overview" on page 461. Type Switches between "Deembedding"...

  • Page 493: Differential Match Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding:TNDefinition CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding:PARameters:C CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding:PARameters:L CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding:PARameters:R CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding:PARameters:G Select File... "Select File..." is enabled as long as the "1-Port Data" network is selected. This net- work is defined by its S-parameters stored in a one-port Touchstone file (*.s1p). No additional parameters are required.
  • Page 494 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 444), this tab is inactive, i.e. all controls except the "Overview" button are grayed out. Overview "Overview" on page 461. Type Currently only Differential Match"Embedding"...

  • Page 495: Config Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Tip: Drag and drop the network symbols in horizontal or vertical direction to switch to the next symbol. Remote command: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>: TNDefinition CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>: PARameters:L<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>: PARameters:R<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>: PARameters:C<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>: PARameters:G<Cmp> Select File... "Select File..." is enabled as long as the "2-Port Data" network is selected. This net- work is defined by its S-parameters stored in a two-port Touchstone file (*.s2p).

  • Page 496: Deembed Assistant Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool = Default offset calculation Bottom = Offset calculation after de-/embedding (GUI mockup) Remote command: [SENSe:]CORRection:EDELay:VNETwork Offset > Wave De-/Embed. If checked, the firmware uses the new, wave-based de-/embedding calculation (default). Otherwise, the legacy S parameter-based calculation is used. See Chap- ter 4.1.5, "Data flow",...
  • Page 497 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool The deembedding assistant functionality requires at least one of the fixture deembed- ding software options: ● R&S ZND-K220 (see Chapter 4.7.9, "In-situ de-embedding", on page 214) ● R&S ZND-K230 (see Chapter 4.7.10, "Smart fixture de-embedding", on page 214) ●...
  • Page 498 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool The dialog contrasts actual and recommended settings, and highlights values that should be adjusted. The values in the "Current" column can be edited; if you modify one of them, the recommended values are updated according to the new value. The "Current"...
  • Page 499 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:REName Show Remeasure Warnings If checked, the "Coupon" and "DUT + Test Fixture" measurements raise warnings, if the measurement is repeated with different ports. This setting is global. Remote command: n.a. Output Directory...
  • Page 500 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool All Deembedding Activated Deactivates or activates all deembeddings (single-ended, balanced, port set, ground loop) for the active channel, if any. Remote command: n.a. Balanced Ports Opens the Balanced Ports dialog. 5.13.11.2 Deembedding Assistant dock widget panel The two pages of the "Offset Embed"...
  • Page 501 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Table 5-6: DUT types DUT type Description ISD only ⃞ "1 x 1 Single Ended" 1 single-ended input, 1 single-ended output ⃞ "1 x Single Ended" 1 single-ended input, no output ⃞ "1 x 1 Balanced" 1 balanced input, 1 balanced output ⃞...
  • Page 502 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool "Single Ended" This coupon model is appropriate for one or more single-ended inputs (outputs), where: ● All inputs (outputs) use the same coupon model and ● There is no interaction between inputs (outputs) if more than one is present on the DUT Figure 5-34: n single-ended input ports (uncoupled) "Balanced"...
  • Page 503 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool "Coupled" This coupon type is available for DUTs with two or more single-ended or balanced inputs (outputs). It is suitable for a multiport DUT with coupled inputs (outputs) that have to be deembedded as a single unit.
  • Page 504 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool ● Chapter 5.13.5.8, "EZD Advanced Settings", on page 484 Page 2: Measure / Load and Apply The second page of the "Deembedding Assistant" dock widget allows you to: ● Measure one or more test coupons, or load their S-parameter data from file ●...
  • Page 505 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Test coupon "Sym 2x Thru" "1x Open" "1x Short" "1x Open, 1x Short" ☑ ☑ ☑ ☑ ☑ ☑ ☑ ⃞ ☑ ⃞ ⃞ ⃞ Depending on the selected test coupon type, the number of logical ports and the graphical representation changes: Test coupon type Single-ended...
  • Page 506 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon:LEFT:PORT CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon:RIGHt:PORT CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon:LEFT:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon:RIGHt:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon:LEFT:FILE CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon:RIGHt:FILE CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon:LEFT:CLEar CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon:RIGHt:CLEar Measure / Apply section After you have measured the coupons or loaded their data from file, you can proceed with the DUT (and test fixture). Either measure DUT and test fixture, or load their data from file.

  • Page 507: Delta-L Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool The deembedding of single-ended and decoupled ports is assigned as Single Ended, the deembedding of balanced ports as Balanced, and the deembedding of coupled as Port Sets deembedding. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:IMPCorrect CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:DUT:PORT CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:DUT:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:RUN CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:DUT:FILE CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:DUT:CLEar...
  • Page 508 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool If the "Fixture Simulator" is disabled for the related channel (see "Fixture Simulator" on page 444), the "Balanced Ports..." button is inactive (grayed out). 5.13.12.1 Delta-L Settings dialog From the "Detal-L Settings" dialog, you can set up the Delta-L measurement channel and how the external tool is run.
  • Page 509 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Port Order Declares how the DUT is connected to the measurement system. Choosing the wrong port ordering for your setup, can result in erroneous results. "Sequential" Ports 1, 2 and 3, 4 form input/output pairs "Odd / Even"...
  • Page 510 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Sweep Frequency Defines the sweep range of the Delta-L channel. The entered "Minimum" and "Maxi- mum" values are set as start and stop frequency when the Delta-L settings are applied using "OK". Furthermore, the VNA collects data for the LPI computation a the "Mini- mum"...
  • Page 511 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Access: ● CHANNEL – [OFFSET EMBED] > "Delta-L" > "Delta-L Measurement" ● Delta-L Settings dialog > "OK" 1L Measurement/2L Measurement/3L Measurement The settings in the "1L Measurement"/"2L Measurement"/"3L Measurement" sections configure and control the measurement of the 1st/2nd/3rd line. The "1L Measurement"...
  • Page 512 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Length ← 1L Measurement/2L Measurement/3L Measurement Specifies the length of the related line. Remote command: CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:LENGth CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M2L:LENGth CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M3L:LENGth Runs the AITT-DL tool with the collected measurement data and the configured Delta-L settings. The firmware enables this action when sufficient data for the required lines are availa- ble (either loaded or measured).
  • Page 513 ® GUI reference R&S Offset Embed softtool Figure 5-38: Method 2L results Markers are added to the smoothed traces at the analysis frequencies. The marker name indicates to which analysis pair it belongs and the computed Delta-L uncertainty. Method 1L For "Method 1L", the Delta-L diagram displays the following traces: ●...

  • Page 514: File Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S File softtool Markers "DeltaL1..." are added to the"StdDev" trace at the analysis frequencies. The marker names indicate the computed Delta-L uncertainties. 5.14 File softtool The "File" softtool allows you to work with recall sets and trace data. Access: SYSTEM –...

  • Page 515: Recall Sets Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S File softtool 5.14.1 Recall sets tab A recall set comprises a set of diagrams together with the underlying system, channel, trace and display settings. It can be stored to a VNA recall set file (*.znx|*.znxml). For background information, see Chapter 4.1.2, "Recall sets", on page 74.
  • Page 516 ® GUI reference R&S File softtool The R&S ZND supports two recall set file formats: ● znx (default) Binary file format, supported by all firmware versions of the R&S ZND ● znxml XML based file format, introduced with the R&S ZNA; supported with firmware ver- sions 3.00 a higher Adds a new setup.
  • Page 517 ® GUI reference R&S File softtool If the recall set to be loaded contains a switch matrix configuration and no differences to the current switch matrix configuration are detected, the recall set is loaded without further inquiry. Otherwise you are asked if you want to adapt the configuration: Select "Cancel"...
  • Page 518 ® GUI reference R&S File softtool In the dialog, proceed as follows: 1. Reassign Matrices: For each "Matrix in Recall Set", select a switch matrix of the same (driver) type as "Assigned Matrix". If no switch matrix of the same type exists, select "Switch Matrix" to open the Exter- nal Matrices dialog that allows you to register/configure additional switch matrices.

  • Page 519: Favorites Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S File softtool 5.14.2 Favorites tab The "Favorites" tab allows you to manage a list of favorite recall sets. A favorite is actually a path to the related recall set, i.e.: ● If the recall set is modified, then the modified recall set is loaded the next time the favorite is selected ●...

  • Page 520: Print Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S File softtool 5.14.3 Print tab The buttons on the "Print" tab allow you to send the diagrams of the active setup to an external printer, to a file or to the clipboard. Content and layout can be defined in the Printer Setup dialog.

  • Page 521: Printer Setup Dialog

    ® GUI reference R&S File softtool 5.14.4 Printer Setup dialog The "Printer Setup" dialog specifies how the diagram content of, and/or other informa- tion on the active recall set is printed. Printer options are specified in three tabs. The lower part of the dialog shows a preview of the print. Access: SYSTEM –...

  • Page 522: Trace Data Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S File softtool If selected in the "Print other information" group, the content of the "Info Table" (see "Info Table: Show / Position" on page 544) and/or "Setup Info" (see "Setup tab" on page 568) is printed on additional pages. 5.14.4.2 Printer tab The "Printer"...

  • Page 523: More Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S File softtool 5.14.6 More tab The buttons on the "More" tab allow you to load simulation data or close the VNA appli- cation. Loading simulation data and adding simulation noise is only available for the PC firm- ware simulation (see Chapter 4.7.22, "R&S ZNXSIM",...

  • Page 524: Configure Additional Simulation Data Dialog

    ® GUI reference R&S File softtool Make sure to deactivate "Simulation Noise" before exporting traces to file. Otherwise your exported results comprise an "artificial" random component. Exit Persists the current state of all opened setups and ends the analyzer session. These states are automatically recalled when the analyzer application is restarted.
  • Page 525 ® GUI reference R&S File softtool The source data files (first column), the mapping between physical ports and data file ports (second column), and the S-parameters to be overwritten (third column) can be defined during Add/Insert. The text box below the table shows the full path to the data file of the selected row.
  • Page 526 ® GUI reference R&S File softtool With "Ok" you proceed to the final Step 2: Assign alias ports from file, "Cancel" dis- cards the import definition. Step 3: Select S-parameters ← Add/Insert In the final step, you select the S-parameter data you actually want to overwrite. The GUI is described in Chapter 5.5.11.3, "Select Parameter dialog",...

  • Page 527: Applic Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool 5.15 Applic softtool The "Applic" softtool gives access to applications and tools that extend the functionality of the analyzer firmware. Access: SYSTEM – [APPLIC] Use the combo-box at the top of the softtool to load one of the available applications and to display the softtool tabs related to this application.
  • Page 528 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool GPIB Explorer Opens a tool that allows you to connect to the analyzer, obtain an overview of all imple- mented remote control programs, test programs, compile and run test scripts. For a detailed description, refer to Chapter 6.1.2, "GPIB Explorer", on page 601.

  • Page 529: Distance To Fault Application

    ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Windows Explorer Opens the Windows Explorer and shows you the contents of the C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\External Tools appli- cation shortcut directory. 5.15.2 Distance to Fault Application With option K3, the R&S ZND can locate faults and discontinuities on cables and trans- mission lines.
  • Page 530 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool A standard DtF measurement is prepared in the order from top to bottom: 1. Enable DtF measurement, see "Distance to Fault" on page 530 2. Configure the distance window, see "Start Distance / Stop Distance" on page 530 3.
  • Page 531 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool ● If the "Stop Distance" is so high that for the selected cable type the signal reflected at "far away discontinuities" would be too small, a warning tooltip is displayed: ● If the "Stop Distance" exceeds the unambiguous range (for the given frequency span and number of sweep points), a warning is displayed in the instrument status bar: Use the...
  • Page 532 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool "OK" reduces the frequency span Δf to Δf = v · c · 100001 / (2.6 · d ), which makes 100001 sweep points sufficient for stop unambiguous display (see the formula above). However, this reduction of the fre- quency span comes at the cost of coarser distance resolution.
  • Page 533 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Note: Make sure to select a sufficient number of sweep points and a suitable fre- quency span before you start the calibration. Otherwise the measurement can yield inaccurate results. Auto Number of Points to let the firmware assist you. Fault Limit Check Enables/disables checking the current "Distance to Fault"...
  • Page 534 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool 5.15.2.2 Available Cable Types... dialog The "Available Cable Types..." dialog allows you to display predefined and user- defined cable types and to add/modify/delete user-defined cable types. Among the predefined cable types, there is an ideal air line (with a relative permittivity of 1, a corresponding velocity factor of 1, and zero attenuation) and a wide range of standard cable types.
  • Page 535 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool Given the specified attenuation values the R&S ZND calculates the attenuation factor at the center of the channel's sweep range and corrects the impulse response trace using this attenuation factor Attenuation (f center The frequency dependence can be defined in two alternative ways: ●...
  • Page 536 ® GUI reference R&S Applic softtool 5.15.2.3 Fault List dock widget The "Fault List" dock widget allows you to explore and save all peaks that violate the active Fault Limit. Access: [Trace] > "Distance to Fault" > "Fault List..." Figure 5-39: Fault List Dock Widget Fault Table The displays a list of all peaks that violate the active Fault...

  • Page 537: Display Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool This CSV type file contains one line (terminated by CR+LF) per fault. With ";" as "Field Separator" and "." as "Decimal Separator", the fault list of Figure 5-39 is exported to 1; Trc1; 457.2 mm; -8.56 dB 2;...
  • Page 538 ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool Active Diagram Selects the active diagram. Each recall set screen can display several diagrams simultaneously, each with a vari- able number of traces. One of these diagrams and traces is active at each time. The diagram number (or name) in the upper right corner of the active diagram is highligh- ted.
  • Page 539 ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool Delete Diagram Deletes the current diagram area including all traces displayed in the diagram area. The remaining diagrams are renumbered; each recall set always contains diagrams with contiguous numbers. "Delete Diag Area" is disabled if the recall set contains only one diagram area: In manual control, each recall set must contain at least one diagram area with one channel and one trace.

  • Page 540: Split Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool The active trace and active channel is highlighted. The scaling of the axes corresponds to the active trace. Tip: To hide all traces except one, activate the context menu of the respective trace name segment in the trace list and select "Hide all other Traces". Remote command: DISPlay:LAYout:OVERlay Split All...
  • Page 541 ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool Some of the "Split" settings are also available in the Diagram tab. Refer to the following sections: ● "Overlay All" on page 539 ● "Split All" on page 540 Dual Split / Triple Split / Quad Split Splits the diagram area into two (three / four) diagrams and distributes the traces among the diagrams.
  • Page 542 ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool Remote command: No command; display configuration only. Split Type The R&S ZND provides the following split types: ● "Lineup": The diagrams are arranged side by side; each diagram occupies the entire screen height. ● "Stack": The diagrams are arranged one below the other;...

  • Page 543: Config Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool 5.16.3 Config tab Displays or hides controls and information elements of the screen and controls the appearance of the individual diagrams. Hiding the controls and information elements leaves more space for the diagrams. All elements can be shown or hidden simultaneously.
  • Page 544 ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool ● "Black and White Solid" sets a white background color. All traces and information elements in the diagram areas are black. All traces are drawn with solid lines. "User Define..." opens a dialog to modify the predefined schemes, changing the colors and styles of the individual display elements.
  • Page 545 ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool The info table is a possible container for info fields and can be placed to the bottom, to the left, or to the right of the screen. See also Chapter 5.7.8, "Info Field tab", on page 357.
  • Page 546 ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool Element Selects the diagram element to be modified. The list contains the background and all traces (more precisely trace properties), text elements and lines in the diagrams. The maximum number of trace properties can be configured in the "User Interface" tab of the "System Config"...
  • Page 547 ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool The different color reaches from the last passed measurement point before the start of the failed segment to the last failed measurement point in the segment. Consequently, the colorized trace segment can begin before the begin of the failed range and can end before its end.
  • Page 548 ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool Remote command: Display color scheme only! DISPlay:CMAP:MARKer[:STATe] General > Black White Scheme / Line Styles Scheme / Light Scheme Modifies the user color scheme, in particular the trace and channel lines, in a prede- fined way.
  • Page 549 ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool If a trace is hidden, then its marker and bandfilter search info is also hidden in the "Info Window". Info Window Configuration dialog The "Info Window Configuration" dialog allows you to select the markers and Display elements of a diagram results to be displayed in the...

  • Page 550: View Bar Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool Figure 5-41: Content selection: bandfilter search info fields Remote command: DISPlay:IWINdow:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] DISPlay:IWINdow:BFILter[:STATe] 5.16.4 View Bar tab Displays or hides information panels and bars of the graphical user interface. Hiding the information elements leaves more space for the diagrams. All elements can be shown or hidden simultaneously.

  • Page 551: Touchscreen Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Display softtool The "Hard Key Panel" can also be closed via the "X" button in its top right corner. Remote command: SYSTem:DISPlay:BAR:HKEY[:STATe] Title Bar Task Bar Toggles the visibility of the title bar of the VNA application window and the Windows® task bar.

  • Page 552: Setup Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool 5.17 Setup softtool The "Setup" softtool allows you to define various system-related settings, to manage global resources, to get system information and to execute service functions. Access: SYSTEM – [SETUP] Persistent vs. session settings The settings in the "Setup"...
  • Page 553 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool English is the preinstalled language. A setup file for additional languages ("Vector Net- work Analyzer Translation Setup") is available for download from the Rohde & Schwarz Internet site. Remote command: Remote Encoding Selects the character encoding used at the remote interface. The selected encoding applies to directory and file names, calibration kit names, calibration unit characteriza- tions and display titles.

  • Page 554: Presets Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Presets tab Specifies the behavior of the R&S ZND upon a preset. Preset Scope Defines whether a preset affects all open recall sets ("Instrument") or the active recall set only. The "Preset Scope" applies to the GUI and to the com- SYSTem:PRESet[:DUMMy] mand.

  • Page 555: Calibration Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool ● the remote commands *RST and SYSTem:PRESet (if "Align *RST to User Defined Preset" is selected in the Remote Preset Configuration section). Furthermore, the user preset file is used as a template, whenever recall set files are created from the GUI.

  • Page 556: User Interface Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Show Cal Kit Label Enables/disables the "Calibration Info" dialog during manual calibration (see "Start Cal Sweep" on page 406). Independent of the state of the "Show Cal Kit Label" flag, cal kit labels are displayed in several other manual calibration dialogs.
  • Page 557 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Transparent Info Fields This checkbox enables or disables transparent info fields for markers and trace statis- tics. Transparent info fields do not hide an underlying trace. Remote command: n.a. Show Sweep Symbols This checkbox turns sweep symbols on or off. Sweep symbols are arrows pointing downward onto the trace.
  • Page 558 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Conductance in Embedding Networks Changes the presentation of "capacitance C<i> in parallel with resistance R<i>" circuit blocks in lumped de/embedding networks (see Chapter 4.6.2.3, "Circuit models for 2- port networks", on page 190 and Chapter 4.6.2.4, "Circuit models for 4-port networks", on page 191).

  • Page 559: Messages Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Reset Colors / Reset Dialogs / Reset Decimal Places / Reset Units Prefix Resets the color settings ("System" > "Display" < "Config"), the dialog properties, the "Decimal Places" and the "Units Prefix" settings. These settings are global and not affected by an instrument preset.

  • Page 560: Channel Bits Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool The displayed information can be useful for program development and optimization; it does not necessarily indicate that a remote control script is faulty or non-executable. Note ● If either "Show Instrument Messages" or "Show Info Messages" is unchecked, this button is disabled.

  • Page 561: Advanced Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Remote command: OUTPut:UPORt:ECBits Advanced tab Collects several advanced settings. Geometric Calculation of Bandfilter Center Defines how bandfilter searches calculate the center frequency of the passband or stopband (see "Bandfilter search" on page 93). If "Geometric Calculation of Bandfilter Center" is checked, the geometric mean of the lower band edge and upper band edge frequencies is used, otherwise their arithmetic mean.

  • Page 562: Power Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool The default export format is explained in Chapter 4.4.2.1, "Touchstone files", on page 135: ● logical columns are vertically aligned using spaces ● positive and negative numbers are vertically aligned by prefixing positive numbers with blanks ●...
  • Page 563 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Power Keep Settling Delay Auto Reduce End Measurement Restart Sweep Time Figure 5-42: Power control at sweep end in Single Sweep mode (power sweep) Note: By default, at sweep end, the output power of the first measurement point is restored ("Auto"...

  • Page 564: Recovery Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Settling Delay / Reset Delay ← Power Reduction at Sweep End Power Mode at Sweep End is set to "Reduce" or "Keep", the "Settling Delay" defines the time between Restart Sweep request and sweep start. See Figure 5-42 for an illus- tration.
  • Page 565 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Common controls State (Device Utilization)/Status Enables/disables the HUMS service. The "Status" LED indicates the current state of the HUMS service: ● grey: inactive ● green: up and runnning If HUMS has been used before, turning on restores the previous protocol settings.
  • Page 566 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Remote command: DIAGnostic:HUMS:DELete:ALL Export HUMS History Allows you to export the previousy collected health and monitoring information to a zip- ped JSON file. Remote command: DIAGnostic:HUMS:DELete:ALL Protocol subtab Gives access to SNMP configuration options for protocol version 2c and 3. SNMPv2c Configuration Allows you to grant read or read-write access via SNMPv2c, and to specify the related community string.
  • Page 567 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Device Tags subtab Allows you to manage key-value pairs for HUMS device tagging. A device tag is a label to assign to your instrument. You can create any device tag for your instrument and define it by a specific key and value. Add / Delete (Trash) / Delete All ●...
  • Page 568 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Print... Allows you to print the contents of the open tab. Opens a "Print Preview" dialog for printer and paper setup. Create R&S Support Information Saves the current selftest results to a zipped report file you can send to R&S Support for fault diagnosis;...
  • Page 569 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Options tab Shows the installed software and hardware options. You can also enable additional software options using the option key supplied with the option. Proceed according to the instructions in the dialog. For an overview of options, refer to Chapter 4.7, "Optional extensions and accesso- ries", on page 200.
  • Page 570 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Hardware tab Gives an overview of the analyzer's hardware configuration and basic hardware-related instrument settings. Configured External Switch Matrices The "Hardware" tab also provides information about connected switch matrices. In par- ticular, for mechanical matrices the current relay switch counts are reported (if suppor- ted by the matrix).
  • Page 571 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Cal Validation tab Displays the result of the last cal validation. See "Cal Validation ..." on page 389. Service tab Allows you to read or specify service-related information. This information can be read R&S HUMS, however, it does not require the corresponding option R&S ZND- K980.
  • Page 572 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:DATE Last Calibration The last date (and time) the instrument was calibrated. Typically set by Rohde&Schwarz service. Remote command: DIAGnostic:SERVice:CALibration:DATE 5.17.1.4 Operators Check wizard Welcome page The "Operators Check" wizard allows you to perform selftests and other helpful checks from one central place in the analyzer GUI.
  • Page 573 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Note that if the "Operators Check" definition uses custom settings, then the opch file possibly references external files. E.g., for power checks with custom limit lines, the generated "OperatorsCheck XML" file <filename>.opch references external limit line files <filename>_opch<i>.line.
  • Page 574 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool The upper part of the page allows you to define the checks, which can then be run with the "Execute" button. The results are displayed in the "Log" area. Figure 5-43: Log area Power check definition For each physical VNA port, you can decide whether to perform a power check ("Active"), whether to use default or custom settings ("Default Settings"), and whether you want to ask the firmware to "Prompt before every port check".
  • Page 575 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Custom Settings Default Settings is unchecked, a click/tap on the respective "Custom Settings" field opens the "Define Limit Lines and Power Level" dialog. This dialog allows you to set the source power for the test of the respective port, and to define port-specific limit lines for the test.
  • Page 576 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool The PASS/FAIL results are also written to the area. Remote command: SYSTem:OPCHeck:PLEVel:PORT<Port>? Summary page Summarizes the check results and allows you to print them. Print Allows you to print the "Summary" of the executed tests, similar to the Print...

  • Page 577: Freq. Ref. Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Report Same functionality as Create R&S Support Information in the system "Info" dialog. 5.17.1.5 Service Function dialog The "Service Function" dialog gives access to the service functions of the instrument. Access: [SETUP] > "Setup" > "Service Function..." Most of the service functions require a service level >...

  • Page 578: Remote Settings Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool State Indicates the state of the internal phase locked loop: If the frequencies are properly synchronized, the state is "locked". Remote command: Internal/External Selects the internal or an external reference clock signal for synchronization. ●...
  • Page 579 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool 5.17.3.1 Controls on the Remote Settings tab IP Address Displays the current IP4 address of the R&S ZND. By default, the analyzer is config- ured to use dynamic TCP/IP configuration (DHCP) and obtain all IP address informa- tion automatically.
  • Page 580 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Note: Remote languages other than DEFAULT are intended for remote control only. A mixed approach, with parts of the instrument configuration defined via the GUI can cause unexpected results. Remote command: SYSTem:LANGuage Define *IDN + *OPT... Opens the "Remote *IDN + *OPT..."...

  • Page 581: External Devices Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool If enabled (default), logical ports are aligned and must be set from low to high port (which was the only possibility prior to firmware V1.91). If set to disabled, new ports can be created freely, like in manual operation. ●...
  • Page 582 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool 5.17.4.1 Controls on the External Devices tab The buttons in the "External Devices" panel open the following dialogs: ● "Power Meters...", see Chapter 5.17.4.2, "External Power Meters dialog", on page 582 ● "Power Meter Config...", see Chapter 5.17.4.3, "External Power Meter Config dia- log", on page 586...
  • Page 583 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Background information Refer to section Chapter 4.7.19, "External power meters", on page 218. The configuration of a new external power meter involves the following steps: 1. Connect the power meter to your VNA using a LAN (VXI-11), GPIB, or USB inter- face.
  • Page 584 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Note: Even though an R&S NRP2 power meter can appear in the table of "Known Devices", adding it to the list of "Configured Devices" directly results in an invalid con- figuration. Use Add Device to configure it manually instead.
  • Page 585 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool When using the NI-VISA library, ensure that the network analyzer itself is not listed as a network device in the Measurement & Automation Explorer. Otherwise, "Scan Instru- ments" initiates an identification query (*IDN?), causing the analyzer to close the "External Power Meters"...
  • Page 586 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool If a power meter is connected to your VNA, the entries in the [Driver for New Instrument] panel can be auto-detected for the specified interface type and address. ● "Identify" sends an identification query ("IDN?") to the specified device address to identify the type and serial number of the connected power meter and select an appropriate driver file.
  • Page 587 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Deembed Two-Port (All Channels) Reads and modifies the state of the built-in S-parameter correction that is available on certain R&S®NRP-Z power sensors. See Application Note 1GP70 "Using S-Parame- ters with R&S®NRP-Z Power Sensors" for background information. This Application Note is available on the Rohde &...

  • Page 588: External Ports Tab

    ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess:SUBModule:ALL? 5.17.5 External Ports tab Allows you to set up switch matrices. Background information Refer to: ● Chapter 4.7.20, "External switch matrices", on page 220 5.17.5.1 Controls on the External Ports tab The buttons in the "External Ports"...
  • Page 589 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Background information Refer to section Chapter 4.7.20, "External switch matrices", on page 220. The registration of a new external switch matrix typically involves the following steps: 1. Connect the switch matrix to your R&S ZND via USB or LAN. 2.
  • Page 590 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Registering a switch matrix is only the first step. To make the external ports available to the vector network analyzer, the RF connections have to be configured, as described in Chapter 5.17.5.4, "Switch Matrix RF Connections dialog", on page 593.
  • Page 591 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Scan Instruments Performs an autodetection of "Known Devices" on the supported interfaces. Note: Unintentional switchover to remote control When using the NI-VISA library, ensure that the network analyzer itself is not listed as a network device in the Measurement & Automation Explorer. Otherwise, "Scan Instru- ments"...
  • Page 592 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Otherwise, manually select the "Driver". Matrix driver files (*.matrix) are stored in the Resources\ExtDev subdirectory of the analyzer's program directory. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:DEFine SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:SERial? Delete All Unregisters all switch matrices, automatically deleting all switch matrix RF connections. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix:DELete 5.17.5.3...
  • Page 593 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool 5.17.5.4 Switch Matrix RF Connections dialog The "Switch Matrix RF Connections" dialog allows you to define the RF connections between the VNA and the switch matrices, and the test port numbering. Access: SYSTEM – [SETUP] > "External Ports" > "RF Connections..." Background information Refer to section Chapter 4.7.20, "External switch...
  • Page 594 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Opens the "Add Switch Matrix" dialog: Select the required matrices and tap "OK" to add them to the RF connection configura- tion or tap "Cancel" to quit the dialog without adding a switch matrix to the RF connec- tion configuration Note: ●...
  • Page 595 ® GUI reference R&S Setup softtool Delete All Opens a confirmation dialog Either select "OK" to remove all switch matrices from the RF connection configuration, or "Cancel" to quit the dialog without removing a switch matrix. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix:DELete Renumber Test Ports Use this function at any time to generate the default test port assignment for the given matrix VNA port connections.

  • Page 596: Help Softtool

    ® GUI reference R&S Help softtool In the "Edit" dialog, define the appropriate VNA port or "Set Unused" to delete the matrix VNA port connection. Remote command: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:CONFigure:MVNA SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix<Matr>:CONFigure:MLVNa Edit Test Port Connection To edit a test port connection, tap on the corresponding port symbol. In the "Edit"...

  • Page 597: Additional Function Keys

    ® GUI reference R&S Additional Function Keys Access: "Help" – "Contents..." | "Index..." | "About..." from the menu bar. Contents... Opens the help browser and activates its "Contents" tab. The "Contents" tab displays the table of contents of the analyzer's online help. Index...
  • Page 598 ® GUI reference R&S Additional Function Keys A preset can be a factory preset or a user-defined preset. It does not affect global set- tings and resources (e.g. "System Config" settings, calibration kits and calibration pool etc.). Tip: If you perform a [PRESET] by mistake, use [UNDO] to restore your previous instrument settings.

  • Page 599: Remote Control

    ® Remote control R&S Introduction to remote control 6 Remote control This chapter provides instructions on how to set up the analyzer for remote control, a general introduction to remote control of programmable instruments, and the descrip- tion of the analyzer's remote control concept. For reference information about all remote control commands implemented by the instrument, complemented by compre- hensive program examples, refer to Chapter 7, "Command...

  • Page 600: Starting A Remote Control Session

    ® Remote control R&S Introduction to remote control VISA library VISA is a standardized software interface library providing input and output functions to communicate with instruments. The I/O channel (LAN, USB, GPIB, ...) is selected at initialization time by its channel-specific resource string (also termed address string), or by an appropriately defined VISA alias (short name).

  • Page 601: Gpib Explorer

    ® Remote control R&S Introduction to remote control 6.1.2 GPIB Explorer The GPIB Explorer is a software tool that allows you to connect to the analyzer, and to obtain an overview of all implemented remote control commands. You can use it to ®...

  • Page 602: Switchover To Remote Control

    ® Remote control R&S Introduction to remote control It remote logging is enabled (SYSTem:LOGGing:REMote[:STATe] ON) the analyzer stores all received commands to the file 'C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\RemoteLog'. 6.1.3 Switchover to remote control On power-up, the instrument is always in the manual operating state and can be oper- ated via the front panel controls.
  • Page 603 ® Remote control R&S Introduction to remote control In case the "Remote" softtool is not visible, tap/click on the toucscreen/application win- dow to restore it. The softkeys in the remote screen are used to modify or quit the remote state: ●...
  • Page 604 ® Remote control R&S Introduction to remote control Switching on the display is ideal for program test purposes but tends to slow down the measurement. Therefore, it is recommended to switch off the display in real measure- ment applications where a tested program script is to be executed repeatedly. The analyzer provides a third display option where the measurement screen is only updated when triggered by the remote control command SYSTem:DISPlay:UPDate ONCE.

  • Page 605: Combining Manual And Remote Control

    ® Remote control R&S Introduction to remote control control. For remote control, addresses 0 through 30 are permissible. The GPIB address is maintained after a reset of the instrument settings. SCPI commands: SYSTem:COMMunicate:GPIB[:SELF]:ADDRess 6.1.3.2 Returning to manual operation Return to manual operation can be initiated via the front panel or via remote control. ●...

  • Page 606: Messages

    ® Remote control R&S Messages 6.2 Messages The messages transferred on the data lines of the GPIB bus or via the RSIB / VXI-11 protocol can be either interface messages or device messages. For a description of interface messages refer to the relevant sections: ●...
  • Page 607 ® Remote control R&S Messages SCPI compatibility The analyzers are compatible to the final SCPI version 1999.0. Not all the commands supported by the instrument are taken from the SCPI standard (Standard Commands for Programmable Instruments), however, their syntax follows SCPI rules. The SCPI standard is based on standard IEEE 488.2 and aims at the standardization of instru- ment-control commands, error handling and the status registers.
  • Page 608 ® Remote control R&S Messages The following rules simplify and abbreviate the command syntax: ● Multiple mnemonics Some mnemonics occur on several levels within one command system. Their effect depends on the structure of the command, i. e. on the position in the com- mand header they are inserted in.
  • Page 609 ® Remote control R&S Messages Several commands in a command line must be separated by a semicolon ;". If the next command belongs to a different command system, the semicolon is followed by a colon. Example: TRIGger:SOURce EXTernal;:SENSe:FREQuency:STARt 1GHZ This command line contains two commands. The first command belongs to the TRIGger system and defines the trigger source (external trigger).

  • Page 610: Scpi Parameters

    ® Remote control R&S Messages Example: TRIGger:SOURce? Response: IMM 6.2.3 SCPI parameters Many commands are supplemented by a parameter or a list of parameters. The parameters must be separated from the header by a "white space". Permissible parameters are numerical values, Boolean parameters, text, character strings and block data.
  • Page 611 ® Remote control R&S Messages Unless it is explicitly stated in the command description, you can use the special numeric parameters for all commands of the analyzer. 6.2.3.2 Boolean parameters Boolean parameters represent two states. The ON state (logically true) is represented by ON or a numerical value different from 0.

  • Page 612: Basic Remote Control Concepts

    ® Remote control R&S Basic remote control concepts 6.2.3.6 Overview of syntax elements The colon separates the mnemonics of a command. In a command line, the separating semicolon marks the uppermost command level. The semicolon separates two commands of a command line. It does not alter the path. The comma separates several parameters of a command.

  • Page 613: Active Traces In Remote Control

    ® Remote control R&S Basic remote control concepts The following frequently used commands create and delete traces, channels, and dia- gram areas: Create new trace and new channel CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine '<Trace Name>', '< Meas Parameter> (if channel <Ch> does not exist yet) Delete trace CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete '<Trace Name>'...

  • Page 614: Initiating Measurements, Speed Considerations

    ® Remote control R&S Basic remote control concepts ● The active traces for manual and remote control may be different. The following program example illustrates how to create, select and reference traces. It is instructive to observe the analyzer screen in order to check the effect of each step. Example: *RST Reset the analyzer, creating channel no.

  • Page 615: Addressing Traces And Channels

    ® Remote control R&S Basic remote control concepts Example: *RST; :INITiate:CONTinuous:ALL OFF Activate single sweep mode for all channels (including the channels created later). INITiate1:IMMediate; *WAI Start a single sweep in channel no. 1, wait until the sweep is terminated before pro- ceeding to the next command (see Chapter 6.4, "Command processing",...

  • Page 616: Command Processing

    ® Remote control R&S Command processing Method Commands / Example Assign or query trace name of a trace numbered CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME 'ABCD' <Trc> CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME? (returns 'ABCD') Query trace number assigned to a trace named CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME:ID? 'ABCD' 'ABCD' (returns the actual trace number; the trace suffix is ignored) Table 6-3: Mixed commands Method...

  • Page 617: Command Recognition

    ® Remote control R&S Command processing nition when the input buffer is full or when it receives a delimiter, <PROGRAM MESSAGE TERMINATOR>, as defined in IEEE 488.2, or the interface message DCL. If the input buffer is full, the message data traffic is stopped and the data received up to then is processed.

  • Page 618: Status Reporting System

    ® Remote control R&S Command processing Before passing on the data to the hardware, the settling bit in the STATus:OPERation register is set (see Chapter 6.5.3.4, "STATus:OPERation", on page 627). The hard- ware executes the settings and resets the bit again as soon as the new state has set- tled.
  • Page 619 ® Remote control R&S Command processing Example: Commands and queries in one message The response to a query combined in a program message with commands that affect the queried value is not predictable. Sending :FREQ:STAR 1GHZ;SPAN 100 :FREQ:STAR? always returns 1000000000 (1 GHz). When: :FREQ:STAR 1GHz;STAR?;SPAN 1000000 is sent, however, the result is not specified by SCPI.

  • Page 620: Status Reporting System

    ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system Command Action after the hardware has settled Programming the controller *WAI Stops further command processing until all commands Send *WAI directly after the command which sent before *WAI have been executed should be terminated before the next command is executed.

  • Page 621: Overview Of Status Registers

    ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system ● Output buffer: contains the messages the instrument returns to the controller. It is not part of the status reporting system but determines the value of the MAV bit in the STB. All status registers have the same internal structure, see Structure of a SCPI status register.

  • Page 622: Structure Of A Scpi Status Register

    ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system not used not used not used -&- -&- -&- not used not used Limit trace no. 14 -&- -&- -&- not used not used Limit trace no. 13 -&- -&- -&- not used Limit trace no.
  • Page 623 ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system The sum bit is obtained from the EVENt and ENABle part for each register. The result is then entered into a bit of the CONDition part of the higher-order register. The instrument automatically generates the sum bit for each register. Thus an event can lead to a Service request throughout all levels of the hierarchy.

  • Page 624: Contents Of The Status Registers

    ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system NTRansition The Negative TRansition part also acts as a transition filter. When a bit of the CONDi- tion part is changed from 1 to 0, the associated NTR bit decides whether the EVENt bit is set to 1.
  • Page 625 ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system ● The STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2> register indicates the result of the limit check. ● The STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity register monitors hardware failures of the analyzer. 6.5.3.1 STB and SRE The STatus Byte (STB) provides a rough overview of the instrument status by collect- ing the pieces of information of the lower registers.
  • Page 626 ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system Related common commands The STB is read out using the command *STB? or a Serial poll. The SRE can be set using command *SRE and read using *SRE? . 6.5.3.2 IST flag and PPE In analogy to the Service request (SRQ), the Individual STatus (IST) flag combines the...
  • Page 627 ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system Bit No. Meaning Execution error This bit is set if a received command is syntactically correct, but cannot be performed for other reasons. An error message with a number between –200 and –300, which describes the error in greater detail, is entered into the error queue.
  • Page 628 ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit<1|2>[:EVENt]? STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1 is also the summary register of the lower level STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit2 register. The bits in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1 register are defined as follows: Bit No. Meaning LIMit2 register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit2 register and the associated ENABle bit is set to 1.
  • Page 629 ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system Refer to the Chapter 9, "Error messages and troubleshooting", on page 1204 for a detailed description of hardware errors including possible remedies. The bits in the STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity register are defined as follows. Bit No. Meaning HARDware register summary This bit is set if a bit is set in the STATus:QUEStionable:INTegrity:HARDware register and...

  • Page 630: Application Of The Status Reporting System

    ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system Bit No. Meaning Instrument temperature is too high This bit is set if the analyzer detects that the instrument temperature is too high. Reduce ambient temperature, keep ventilation holes of the casing unobstructed. Unstable level control This bit is set if the analyzer detects an excessive source level at one of the ports.
  • Page 631 ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system 6.5.4.1 Service request The R&S ZND can send a service request (SRQ) to the controller. Usually this service request causes an interrupt, to which the control program can react appropriately. Initiating an SRQ As shown in section Overview of status registers, an SRQ is initiated if one or several...
  • Page 632 ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system 3. Query STAT:QUES:LIMit1:EVENT? (query STATus:QUEStionable:LIMit1 register) If bit 1 is set, then the first trace failed the limit check. The SRQ is the only possibility for the instrument to become active on its own. Each controller program should set the instrument such that a service request is initiated in the case of malfunction.

  • Page 633: Reset Values Of The Status Reporting System

    ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system Queries are usually used after an SRQ to obtain more detailed information on its cause. Decimal representation of a bit pattern The STB and ESR registers contain 8 bits, the SCPI registers 16 bits. The contents of a status register is keyed and transferred as a single decimal number.
  • Page 634 ® Remote control R&S Status reporting system Event Switching on DCL, SDC *RST or STA- *CLS supply voltage (Device Tus:PRE- SYS- Power-On-Status- Clear, Tem:PRE- Clear Selected Set:ALL Device Clear) Clear EVENt parts of the reg- isters Clear ENABle parts of all OPERation and QUESTiona- ble registers, Fill ENABle parts of all other...

  • Page 635: Command Reference

    ® Command reference R&S Special terms and notation 7 Command reference This chapter describes all common commands and SCPI commands implemented by the analyzer. Validity of the command set The commands reported in this chapter are valid for vector network analyzers with any number of ports.

  • Page 636: Upper- Vs. Lower-Case

    ® Command reference R&S Special terms and notation 7.1.1 Upper- vs. lower-case Upper-/lower-case characters characterize the long and short form of the mnemonics in a command. The short form consists of all uppercase characters, the long form of all uppercase plus all lowercase characters. It is recommended to use either the short form or the long form;...

  • Page 637: Common Commands

    ® Command reference R&S Common commands The analyzer provides numeric suffixes for channels, traces, ports, markers etc. If unspecified, a numeric suffix is replaced by 1. The number of ports depends on the analyzer model. No restrictions apply to number of markers, channel, trace, and diagram suffixes.

  • Page 638: Scpi Command Reference

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Command Parameters / Remarks Short Description *OPT? – Queries the options included in the instrument and returns a list of the options installed. The response consists of arbitrary ASCII response data according to OPTion identification query only IEEE 488.2.

  • Page 639: Calculate Commands

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ● INITiate commands....................885 ● INSTrument commands..................888 ● MEMory commands....................889 ● MMEMory commands................... 891 ● OUTPut commands....................928 ● PROGram commands...................933 ● [SENSe:] commands.....................936 ● SOURce commands................... 1040 ● STATus commands..................... 1066 ●...
  • Page 640 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ..................641 CALCulate:CALValidate:RUN ................642 CALCulate:CALValidate:RUN:RESult? .................. 642 CALCulate:CALValidate:STANdard CALCulate:CALValidate:AVERage[:STATe] <Boolean> Disables/enables averaging for cal validation. Parameters: <Boolean> *RST: ON (1) Manual operation: "Preferences" on page 415 CALCulate:CALValidate:CHARacteriza <String> Selects the CalU characterization to be used for the cal validation. to select the CalU standard to be used CALCulate:CALValidate:STANdard for the validation.
  • Page 641 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <Value> *RST: -200 (LOWer) | +200 (UPPer) Default unit: mU Manual operation: "Validation Limits" on page 415 CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:MAGNitude:LOWer <Port>, <Value> CALCulate:CALValidate:RESPonse:MAGNitude:UPPer <Port>, <Value> Defines the magnitude cal validation limits for the MLINear trace format (see CALCulate:CALValidate:FORMat).
  • Page 642 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Validate" on page 414 CALCulate:CALValidate:RUN:RESult? Displays the result (PASS/FAIL) of the preceding cal validation (CALCulate: CALValidate:RUN). Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Validate" on page 414 CALCulate:CALValidate:STANdard <Standard> Selects the CalU standard to be used for cal validation. Parameters: <Standard>...
  • Page 643 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference The "set command" either imports formatted or unformatted trace data to the selected channel's active trace (see Chapter 4.1.5, "Data flow", on page 81) or writes error terms of the selected channel. Note ●...
  • Page 644 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: Writing memory traces *RST; SWE:POIN 3 Create a data trace 'Trc1' with 3 sweep points, making the cre- ated trace the active trace of channel 1 (omitted optional mne- monic SENSe1). TRAC:COPY 'MemTrc1','Trc1'; :CALC:PAR:SEL 'MemTrc1' Copy the data trace to a memory trace and select the memory trace as an active trace.
  • Page 645 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Error Term Description Receive Ports (S-parameter) SCORr14 Source match 3 (S33) SCORr15 Reflection tracking 3 (S33) SCORr16 Isolation 3 (S31) SCORr17 Load match 3 (S31) SCORr18 Transmission tracking 3 (S13) SCORr19 Isolation 1 (S13) SCORr20 Load match 1 (S13)
  • Page 646 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:CALL <Format>, <Data>... The query reads the current response values of all S-parameter data traces at channel <Ch>'s data access point <DACPoint>. If a full n-port system error correction is active in the related channel, the command reads the full nxn S-matrix of the calibrated ports (there is no need to create or display the S-parameter traces).
  • Page 647 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:CALL:CATalog? Returns all traces which are available for in channel CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:CALL no. <Ch>. The response is a string parameter with all S-parameter traces in the current channel or in the active system error correction; see example. Suffix: <Ch>...
  • Page 648 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:DATA:DALL? <Format> Reads the current response values of all data traces of the current recall set. Use to query data traces and memory traces. CALCulate:DATA:ALL? Query parameters: <Format> FDATa | SDATa | MDATa Output format for the S-parameter data, see CALCulate<Chn>:DATA.
  • Page 649 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Query parameters: <Format> SDATa Read unformatted sweep data (fixed parameter): Returns the real and imaginary part of each measurement point (2 values per trace point irrespective of the selected trace format). <FwCount>...
  • Page 650 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Query parameters: <Format> SDATa Read unformatted sweep data (fixed parameter): Returns the real and imaginary part of each measurement point (2 values per trace point, irrespective of the selected trace format). <RvCount> Number of sweep to be read. 1 denotes the last sweep acquired, 2 denotes the second-last and so forth.
  • Page 651 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:DATA:TRACe <TraceName>, <Format>, <Data>... The query gets the trace data of an arbitrary (not necessarily the active) trace, refer- enced by its trace name <TraceName>. The "set direction" allows to import formatted or unformatted trace data to an existing trace (data access point 3 or 2 in Chapter 4.1.5, "Data flow",...
  • Page 652 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - enable or disable "Adjust Time Gate". *RST: Example: *RST; :CALCulate1:TRANsform:TIME:STATe ON CALCulate1:FILTer:GATE:TIME:STATe ON; SHOW ON Activate time domain representation and a time gate in channel no. 1. Display the time gate CALCulate1:FILTer:GATE:TIME:STARt 2ns;...
  • Page 653 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <SidebandSupp> Sideband suppression Range: 10 dB to 120 dB Increment: 10 dB *RST: 32 dB Default unit: dB Example: *RST; :CALC:FILT:TIME:WIND DCH Reset the instrument and select a Dolph-Chebyshev time gate for filtering the data in the frequency domain. CALC:FILT:TIME:DCH 25 Set the sideband suppression to 25 dB.
  • Page 654 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:FILT:TIME:SHAP? Reset the instrument and query the type of time gate used. The response is WIDE. Manual operation: "Shape" on page 298 CALCulate<Chn>:FILTer[:GATE]:TIME:SHOW <Boolean> Enables or disables permanent display of the gate limits. Suffix: <Chn>...
  • Page 655 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <StopTime> Start or stop time of the time gate. Range: -100 s to +99.999999999998 s (start time ) and -99.999999999998 s to +100 s (stop time) Increment: 0.1 ns *RST: -1E-009 s (start time) to +4E-009 s (stop time) Default unit: s Example: *RST;...
  • Page 656 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <TimeGateFilter> BPASs | NOTCh BPASs Band pass filter: Pass all information in specified time region and reject everything else NOTCh Notch filter: Reject all information in specified time region and pass everything else *RST: BPASs...
  • Page 657 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant... These commands implement the functionality of the Deembed Assistant tab and the related Deembedding Assistant dock widget panel. The deembedding assistant functionality requires at least one of the fixture deembed- ding software options: ●...
  • Page 658 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Before measuring, select the test coupon type using CALCulate:FMODel:DEAS and the ports using sistant:COUPon:<LEFT|RIGHt>:TYPE CALCulate:FMO Del:DEASsistant:COUPon:<LEFT|RIGHt>:PORT. Setting parameters: <CouponType> SYMMetric2x | OPEN1x | SHORt1x Test coupon type to be measured CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon: <LEFT|RIGHt>:TYPE OPSHort1x, you have to measure OPEN1x and SHORt1x (or load it from file).
  • Page 659 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference SYMMetric2x OPEN1x SHORt1x OPSHort1x ☑ ☑ ☑ ☑ ☑ ☑ ☑ ⃞ ☑ ⃞ ⃞ ⃞ ● To measure the test coupon, use: – CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon:<LEFT|RIGHt>:PORT select the port(s) at which the test coupon is measured. –...
  • Page 660 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:DUT:MEASure Measures DUT + fixture at the ports defined using CALCulate:FMODel: DEASsistant:DUT:PORT. Usage: Event Options: R&S ZND-K220 | R&S ZND-K230 | R&S ZND-K210 Manual operation: "Measure / Apply section" on page 506 CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:DUT:PORT <Position>, <PortNum> Before you can measure DUT + fixture or run the fixture deembedding tool (CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:RUN), you have to define consecutive port ranges for the left/right side of the fixture.
  • Page 661 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference 1 x 1 balanced BXSE 1 x balanced, 1 x single-ended (ISD only) SE21 2 x 1 single-ended (ISD only) SE22 2 x 2 single-ended (ISD only) NXSE n x single-ended (ISD only) NXMSe n x m single-ended (ISD only) n x balanced (ISD only)
  • Page 662 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:IMPCorrect <Boolean> Activates impedance correction during DUT + test fixture measurement. Parameters: <Boolean> ON | 1 Impedance correction activated OFF | 0 Impedance correction deactivated Manual operation: "Measure / Apply section" on page 506 CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:PRESet Resets the DUT and fixture settings of the deembedding assistant to their respective defaults.
  • Page 663 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference This simplification is allowed for two-sided DUTs using the same coupon model for the left and right side (CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon:LEFT| RIGHt:TYPE). Parameters: <Boolean> ON (1) | OFF (0), where ON means only the left coupon model is measured (CALCulate:FMODel:DEASsistant:COUPon: LEFT:MEASure) or loaded from file...
  • Page 664 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ............667 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:CACHe:CLEar:ALL ........... 667 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:CACHe:CLEar:SELected ................668 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:DIFFmode ................ 668 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:FILename ................ 668 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M2L:FILename ................ 668 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M3L:FILename ................668 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:LENGth ................668 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M2L:LENGth ................668 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M3L:LENGth ................. 669 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:MEASure ................. 669 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M2L:MEASure ................. 669 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M3L:MEASure ...............
  • Page 665 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference You can use the algorithms's default or custom frequencies (see CALCulate: FMODel:DELT:FREQuencies:USEDefault). Usage: Query only Options: R&S ZND-K231 Manual operation: "Frequencies" on page 509 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:FREQuencies:CURRent:COUNt? Returns at how many frequencies the Delta-L algorithm calculates the loss-per-inch uncertainties.
  • Page 666 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference This command specifies whether to use the tool's default frequencies or custom fre- quencies, which can be defined using CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:FRE commands. Quencies:USER Parameters: <Boolean> ON (1) Use default frequencies OFF (0) Use custom frequencies Options: R&S ZND-K231 Manual operation:...
  • Page 667 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:FREQuencies:USER:DELete:ALL The Delta-L algorithm can calculate the loss-per-inch uncertainties either at default or at custom frequencies (see CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:FREQuencies: USEDefault). This command clears the list of custom frequencies. Usage: Event Options: R&S ZND-K231 Manual operation: "Frequencies"...
  • Page 668 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Setting parameters: <String> Path to the Touchstone file, relative to the cache directory. Usage: Setting only Options: R&S ZND-K231 Manual operation: "Clear All 1L Measurements/Clear Selected 1L Measure- ments" on page 512 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:DIFFmode <Boolean> The one-length method (CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:METHod M1L) handles single-...
  • Page 669 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Options: R&S ZND-K231 Manual operation: "Length" on page 512 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M1L:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M2L:MEASure CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:M3L:MEASure Measures the full set of S-parameters at the active ports (see CALCulate:FMO Del:DELT<Ph_pt>:M1L|M2L|M3L[:STATe]). Usage: Event Options: R&S ZND-K231 Manual operation: "Measure" on page 511 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT<Ph_pt>:M1L[:STATe] <Boolean>...
  • Page 670 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference *RST: SINGleended Options: R&S ZND-K231 Manual operation: "Measurements" on page 508 CALCulate:FMODel:DELT:METHod <Method> Selects the Delta-L+ characterization method to be used. Parameters: <Method> M1L | M2L | M3L One, two, or three line/length analysis Options: R&S ZND-K231 Manual operation:...
  • Page 671 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference The resulting frequency step size and IF bandwidth can be queried using CALCulate: on page 671 and FMODel:DELT:SWEep:CONTrol:STEP? CALCulate:FMODel: on page 671, respectively. DELT:SWEep:CONTrol:IFBW? Parameters: <SweepControl> DEFault | CURRent DEFault Use the default values of the Delta-L algorithm: 10 MHz frequency step size, 1 kHz IF bandwidth SweepControl Use the values of the active channel...
  • Page 672 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Frequency> Frequency values The default MINimum frequency is the standard Delta-L start fre- quency of 10 MHz. The default MAXimum frequency is the instrument's maximum frequency. Default unit: Hz Options: R&S ZND-K231 Manual operation: "Sweep Frequency"...
  • Page 673 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ............674 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:COUPon[:STATe] ................674 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:DCEXtrapolat ................674 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:DUT:MEASure ............674 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:DUT:MEASure:FILename ..........675 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar ..............675 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:DUT[:STATe] ..............675 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:GENerate:SIDE<1|2> ................676 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:IMPedance ..............676 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:IMPedance:BWIDlimit ..............676 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:IMPedance:REFerence ................676 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:PORT:ORDer ..................677 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:PRESet ................677 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:RUN:RUN ..............677 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Pt>:RUN[:STATe] CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:COUPon:MEASure For a fixture modeling with the Easy De-embedding (EZD) tool, this command starts the measurement of the symmetrical 2xThru coupon at the active ports (see...
  • Page 674 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:EZD<Ph_pt>:COUPon[:STATe] <Boolean> For a fixture modeling with the EZD tool, this command allows to specify the ports to which the test coupon is connected. This has to be defined before measuring the test coupon (using CALCulate:FMODel: EZD:COUPon:MEASure).
  • Page 675 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <String> Path to the Touchstone file, either absolute or relative to the selected working directory (CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory). Options: R&S ZND-K210 Manual operation: "Load File" on page 477 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar Invalidates the file path previously set using CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:DUT: MEASure:FILename.
  • Page 676 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:IMPedance <Boolean> Switches the impedance correction of the EZD tool ON or OFF. Its reference impe- dance and bandwidth limit parameters can be set using CALCulate:FMODel:EZD: and CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:IMPedance:BWIDlimit, IMPedance:REFerence respectively. This is a global setting. Parameters: <Boolean>...
  • Page 677 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:PRESet Restores the global default settings of the EZD tool. Usage: Event Options: R&S ZND-K210 Manual operation: "Reset to Default" on page 474 CALCulate:FMODel:EZD:RUN:RUN Runs the EZD tool. Before executing this command, make sure that: ●...
  • Page 678 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD... Commands for AtaiTec's In Situ De-Embedding (ISD) tool, see http://ataitec.com/prod- ucts/isd/ ..............678 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:ATTenuation:BEHavior ..............679 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure ............. 679 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename ........... 679 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename:CLEar ............679 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:OPEN ........... 680 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:OPEN:FILename ............680 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:SHORt .......... 680 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:SHORt:FILename ............680 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:COUPon[:STATe] ................
  • Page 679 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference RESonant The 2x thru test coupon will be split and used directly for deem- bedding (parameter value 3). This option may be more accurate when the fixture and 2x Thru have the same impedance at every location Manual operation: "Test Coupons >...
  • Page 680 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Measure / Measure Open / Measure Short" on page 475 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:MEASure:OPEN:FILename <String> For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool and coupon type OPSHort1x (see CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:TYPE), this command loads the properties of the Open coupon from a Touchstone file.
  • Page 681 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: Chapter 8.2.6, "Fixture modeling", on page 1202 Manual operation: "Active" on page 476 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon:TYPE <CouponType> Sets/gets the coupon type to be measured for a fixture modeling with the ISD tool. Parameters: <CouponType> SYMMetric2x | OPEN1x | SHORt1x | OPSHort1x Example: Chapter 8.2.6, "Fixture...
  • Page 682 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Load File" on page 477 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:DUT:MEASure:FILename:CLEar Invalidates the file path previously set using CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:DUT: MEASure:FILename. Usage: Event Manual operation: "Load File" on page 477 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD<Ph_pt>:DUT[:STATe] <Boolean> For a fixture modeling with the ISD tool, this command allows to specify the ports to which the test fixture is connected.
  • Page 683 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:FTIMe:OVERride <Boolean> If set to true, the flight time for DUT + lead-in is specified using CALCulate:FMODel: ISD:FTIMe:DUT. Otherwise, it is calculated automatically. True is equivalent to setting the leadin_dut_time batch mode parameter of the ISD tool to auto.
  • Page 684 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:PORT:ORDer <PortOrder> Defines how the ISD tool shall interpret the DUT + Fixture data (see CALCulate: FMODel:ISD:DUT:MEASure): ● NON: ports 1 to N are on the left and ports N+1 to 2*N are on the right ●...
  • Page 685 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:PRESet Restores the global default settings of the ISD tool. Usage: Event Manual operation: "Reset to Default" on page 474 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:RUN:RUN Runs the ISD tool. Before executing this command, make sure that ● the test coupon measurement (using CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:COUPon: MEASure:OPEN...
  • Page 686 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <AttenLeadInScaling> Manual operation: "Scaling for attenuation" on page 481 CALCulate:FMODel:ISD:SCALe:FREQuency <MaxFrequency> Defines the maximum frequency to deembed. Corresponds to the max_frequency batch mode parameter of the ISD tool. Parameters: <MaxFrequency> Default unit: Hz Manual operation: "Max Freq to Deembed"...
  • Page 687 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:SFD... Commands for PacketMicro's Smart Fixture De-embedding (SFD), see https:// www.packetmicro.com/Products/sfd-tool.html ..................687 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:AUTO ..............687 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:COUPon:MEASure ............ 688 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename .......... 688 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename:CLEar ............688 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD<Ph_pt>:COUPon[:STATe] ................. 688 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:COUPon:TYPE ..................688 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:DIFFcfg ................689 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:DUT:MEASure ............689 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:DUT:MEASure:FILename ..........689...

  • Page 688: Calculate:fmodel:sfd:coupon:measure:filename:clear

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:COUPon:MEASure:FILename <String> For a fixture modeling with the SFD tool, this command loads the coupon properties from a Touchstone file. The coupon type can be selected using CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:COUPon:TYPE. Parameters: <String> Path to the Touchstone file, either absolute or relative to the selected working directory (CALCulate:FMODel:DIRectory).

  • Page 689: Calculate:fmodel:sfd:dut:measure

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <SFDPortConfig> ODD | NON ODD: odd ports are on the left and even ports are on the right NON: ports 1 to N are on the left and ports N+1 to 2·N are on the right Manual operation: "2x Thru Port Ordering"...

  • Page 690: Calculate:fmodel:sfd:preset

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:IMPedance <Boolean> Enables/disables the impedance correction of the SFD tool. This is a global setting. Parameters: <Boolean> ON (1) Impedance correction enabled OFF (0) Impedance correction disabled Manual operation: "Use Impedance Correction" on page 474 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:PRESet Restores the global default settings of the SFD tool.
  • Page 691 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Apply" on page 479 CALCulate:FMODel:SFD:TOTaldiffcfg <SFDPortConfig> Tells the SFD tool about the port ordering of the test fixture. Parameters: <SFDPortConfig> ODD | NON ODD: odd ports are on the left and even ports are on the right NON: ports 1 to N are on the left and ports N+1 to 2·N are on the right Manual operation:...
  • Page 692 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:FMODel:REName <Boolean> If set to ON (1), the names of subsequently generated "Test Coupon" and "DUT + Test Fixture" files are prefixed with the current date and time. Parameters: <Boolean> Manual operation: "Output Settings" on page 474 7.3.1.5 CALCulate:LIMit...

  • Page 693: Calculate:Limit:circle:clear

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ..............707 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:TYPE ................708 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SOUNd[:STATe] ..................708 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:STATe ................709 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:STATe:AREA ..............709 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:TTLout<Pt>[:STATe] CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle:CLEar Resets the circle test for the active trace of channel <Chn>. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Usage: Event Manual operation:...

  • Page 694: Calculate:Limit:circle:fail

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST; CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:DATA 0, 0, 0.5 Define a circle limit line centered around the origin of the polar diagram, assigning a radius of 0.5 U. CALCulate:FORMat POLar CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:DISPlay ON Activate a polar diagram and show the circle limit line in the dia- gram.

  • Page 695: Calculate:Limit:clear

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:CIRCle[:STATe] <Boolean> Switches the circle limit check on or off. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> Example: *RST; CALCulate:LIMit:CIRCle:DATA 0, 0, 0.5 Define a circle limit line centered around the origin of the polar diagram, assigning a radius of 0.5 U.
  • Page 696 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <StartStim> <StopStim> Pairs of stimulus values, each pair confining a limit line segment. See also Chapter 4.4.1.1, "Rules for limit line definition", on page 127.
  • Page 697 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DATA <Type>, <StartStim>, <StopStim>, <StartResp>, <StopResp> Defines the limit line type, the stimulus and response values for a limit line with an arbi- trary number of limit line segments. See Chapter 4.4.1.1, "Rules for limit line definition", on page 127.
  • Page 698 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DCIRcle:DATA <CenterX>, <CenterY>, <Radius> Defines the display circle for the active trace of channel <Chn>. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <CenterX> X position (real part) of the display circle's center <CenterY>...
  • Page 699 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 1.5 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 1.5 GHz, using default response values. CALC:LIM:DATA 1,1500000000, 2000000000,2,3 Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning response values of +2 dB and +3 dB.
  • Page 700 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz, using default response values. CALC:LIM:STAT ON; FAIL? Switch the limit check on and query the result. CALC:LIM:STAT:AREA LEFT, TOP For a subsequent check at the GUI or a hardcopy, move the pass/fail message to the top left position.

  • Page 701: Calculate:Limit:control[:Data]

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer/UPPer sets the type and response values of even/odd limit line segments and gets the response values of even/odd limit line seg- ments - no matter what the current type of these segments actually is! Both commands will only work, if the total number of limit line segments is even.
  • Page 702 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: CALC:LIM:LOW -10, 0, 0, -10 Define two limit line segments covering the entire sweep range. Two upper limit line segments with default response values are created in addition. CALC:LIM:UPP 0, 10, 10, 0 Change the response values of the upper limit line segments .

  • Page 703: Calculate:Limit:control:shift

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:LOWer:SHIFt <LimShift> CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:UPPer:SHIFt <LimShift> These commands shift all lower and upper limit line segments assigned to the active trace in vertical direction. Both commands shift all limit lines; they have the same func- tionality.

  • Page 704: Calculate:Limit:data

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST :SENSe1:FREQuency1:STARt 1 GHZ; STOP 5 GHZ :SENSe1:SWEep:POINts 5 After a reset, modify the default trace 'Trc1'. :CALCulate1:LIMit1:DATA 1, 1000000000, 2000000000, -40, -30 :CALCulate1:LIMit2:DATA 1, 4000000000, 5000000000, -30, -40 Define upper limit lines for freqency ranges [1 GHz, 2 GHz] and [4 GHz, 5 GHz] :CALCulate1:LIMit1:POINts:UPPer? 'Trc1' Query the limit lines.

  • Page 705: Calculate:Limit:segment:count

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: CALC:LIM:DATA 1,1500000000, 2000000000,2,3 Define an upper limit line segment (segment no. 1) in the stimu- lus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning response val- ues of +2 dB and +3 dB. :CALC:LIM:SEGM:AMPL:STAR 5;...

  • Page 706: Calculate:Limit:segment:Interpol

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST SENS:FREQ:STAR 1GHz SENS:FREQ:STOP 3GHz CALC:LIM:CONT 1GHz, 2GHz, 2GHz, 3GHz CALC:LIM:SEGM1:FORM '22-(20/25.78)*StimVal/1e9' CALC:LIM:SEGM1:FORM:STAT ON CALC:LIM:SEGM2:FORM '15-(6/25.78)*StimVal/1e9' CALC:LIM:SEGM2:TYPE LMIN CALC:LIM:DISP ON CALC:LIM:STAT ON Manual operation: "Linear/Formula" on page 326 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:FORMula:STATe <State> Defines whether a custom formula is used for limit line segment <Seg> of the related trace.
  • Page 707 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Segment List" on page 323 CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STARt <FreqPowTime> CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:SEGMent<Seg>:STIMulus:STOP <StimVal> These commands change the start and stop stimulus values (i.e. the smallest and the largest stimulus values) of a limit line segment. A segment must be created first to enable the commands (e.g CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit:DATA).
  • Page 708 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Seg> Segment number Parameters: <LimLineType> LMIN | LMAX | OFF Limit line type Range: LMAX (upper limit line segment), LMIN (lower limit line segment), OFF (limit check switched off, limit line segment not deleted) *RST: LMAX...
  • Page 709 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - Limit check on or off. *RST: Example: *RST; CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz, using default response values. CALC:LIM:STAT ON;...
  • Page 710 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:LIM:CONT 1 GHZ, 2 GHZ Define an upper limit line segment in the stimulus range between 1 GHz and 2 GHz, using default response values. CALC:LIM:STAT ON; TTL2 ON Switch the limit check on and activate the TTL out pass 2 signal. Manual operation: "TTL1 Pass / TTL2 Pass"...
  • Page 711 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ........720 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:EXECute ............721 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:RESult? ........721 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:RESult? ............. 722 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:SPAN ............722 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:STARt .............722 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:STOP ........... 722 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:STARt ..........722 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:STOP ................723 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:MODE ............723 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:MODE ..............723 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:EXCursion ............724 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:EXCursion:STATe ..............724 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:THReshold ............
  • Page 712 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK1 ON; MARK2 ON Create markers 1 and 2 and assign them to the trace no. 1. CALC:MARK:AOFF Remove both markers. Usage: Event Manual operation:...
  • Page 713 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: CALC:MARK:FUNC:BWID:MODE BST Select a bandstop filter search. CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC BFIL Initiate the bandpass filter search for the current trace. Create markers M1 to M4. CALC:MARK:SEAR:BFIL:RES ON Display the marker info field in the diaram area. CALC:MARK:BWID 6 Select a 6-dB bandwidth for the bandstop.
  • Page 714 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Marker coupling is enabled using CALCulate:MARKer:COUPled[:STATe] Changing the coupling type automatically disables marker coupling throughout the recall set. Parameters: <Type> ALL | CHANnel | DIAGram Marker coupling mode recall set-wide CHANnel channel-wide DIAGram diagram-wide Example: on page 713...
  • Page 715 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference SCPI POLar "Real Imag" COMPlex (for R&S ZVR compatibility) GDELay "Delay" REAL "Real" IMAGinary "Imag" "SWR" LINPhase "Lin Mag Phas"e MLPhase (for R&S ZVR compatibility) LOGPhase "dB Mag Phase" MDPhase (for R&S ZVR compatibility) IMPedance "R + j X"...
  • Page 716 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:DELTa[:STATe] <Boolean> Switches the delta mode for marker <Mk> on trace no. <Chn> on or off. The marker must be created before using ON. If the CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>[:STATe] active trace contains no reference marker, the command also creates a reference marker.
  • Page 717 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> Marker number (ignored for reference markers) Parameters: <Active> Boolean Manual operation: "Excursion Settings" on page 346 CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FORMat <OutFormat> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FORMat <OutFormat> Sets/queries the output format for the (complex) value of the related marker. Suffix: <Chn>...
  • Page 718 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:BWIDth:MODE <BandfilterType> Selects the bandfilter search mode. In contrast to manual control, bandfilter tracking is not automatically activated. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk> This numeric suffix is ignored and may be set to any value because the bandfilter search functions always use markers M1 to M4.
  • Page 719 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] <NumSearchRange> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] Assigns search range no. <NumSearchRange> to the related marker (marker <Mk> or the reference marker of channel <Chn>'s active trace). Selects the search range, e.g. to display range limit lines or define the start and stop values.

  • Page 720: Calculate:Marker:Reference:function:execute

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STARt <StarSearchRange> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STOP <StopSearchRange> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STARt <StarSearchRange> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER:STOP <Value> These commands define the start and stop values of the search range selected via CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:FUNCtion:DOMain:USER[:RANGe] Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk>...

  • Page 721: Calculate:Marker:Function:result

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK ON Create marker M1 and assign it to trace no. 1. CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC MAX; RES? Move the created marker to the absolute maximum of the trace and query the stimulus and response value of the search result.

  • Page 722: Calculate:Marker:Function:span

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:FUNCtion:SPAN Sets the span of the sweep range equal to the absolute value of the first coordinate of the active delta marker <Mk> on trace no. <Chn>. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace <Mk>...

  • Page 723: Calculate:Marker:Mode

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:MODE <Mode> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:MODE <Mode> Defines the positioning mode of the related marker (see "Marker addressing" on page 710). The marker doesn't have to be created before, the mode can be assigned in advance. Suffix: <Chn>...
  • Page 724 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:EXCursion:STATe <Boolean> Activates or deactivates the minimum excursion for multiple peak searches. to set the minimum peak excur- CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer:MPEak:EXCursion sion. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Active> Boolean Manual operation: "Excursion Settings"...
  • Page 725 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <MarkerName> Marker name (string parameter) *RST: 'M1' for marker no. 1 etc. Example: Suppose that the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK:NAME '&$% 1'; :CALC:MARK ON Create marker 1 named "&$% 1" and display the marker . CALC:MARK:REF ON CALC:MARK:REF:NAME 'Reference' Display the reference marker and rename it "Reference".
  • Page 726 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:SEARch:FORMat <SearchFormat> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:SEARch:FORMat <SearchFormat> Defines the format in which you want to specify the target value CALCulate<Chn>: for the related marker (see "Marker addressing" on page 710). MARKer<Mk>:TARGet Each marker may have a different target format. The table below gives an overview on how a complex target value z = x + jy is converted.
  • Page 727 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: Suppose channel 1's selected trace is POLar and marker 1 isn't yet created :CALCULATE1:MARKER1 ON Create/enable Marker 1 :CALCulate1:MARKer1:FUNCtion:SELect TARGet Select TARGet search mode for marker 1 :CALCulate1:MARKer1:SEARch:FORMat? Query the target format of marker 1. The result is DEF and for polar diagrams the default target format is "Phase".

  • Page 728: Calculate:Marker[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: Suppose the active recall set contains an active trace no. 1. CALC:MARK ON; :CALC:MARK:FUNC:EXEC MAXimum Create marker no. 1 and assign it to trace no. 1. Activate a maxi- mum search for marker no. 1. CALC:MARK:SEAR:TRAC ON Enable the tracking mode for the created marker.
  • Page 729 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:TARGet <TargetSearchVal> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:TARGet <TargetSearchVal> Defines the target value for the target search of marker the related marker (see "Marker addressing" on page 710). The target search can be activated using CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>: FUNCtion:EXECute TARGet CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence: FUNCtion:EXECute TARGet.

  • Page 730: Calculate:Marker:Reference[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:THReshold:STATe <Active> CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:THReshold:STATe <Boolean> Activates or deactivates the marker-specific threshold for (single) peak searches with the related marker (see "Marker addressing" on page 710) . CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:THReshold CALCulate<Chn>: to set the threshold value. MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:THReshold Suffix: <Chn>...

  • Page 731: Calculate:Marker:X

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference The marker stimulus can be set using CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:X or CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:X, but the response value remains fixed. ARBitrary: freezes the marker at the position determined by the current stimulus and response value. Tracking is disabled. The marker stores the stimulus value and –...

  • Page 732: Calculate:Marker:Y

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <StimulusValue> If the marker mode of the related marker is ARBitrary and the trace format is complex (Polar, Smith, inverted Smith), this is the real part Re(z ) of the marker value z .
  • Page 733 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <ResponseValue> Setting (ARBitrary mode only): sets the vertical position of the marker in Y units of the current trace format. Query: returns the marker position formatted according to the current marker format (see CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>: FORMat CALCulate<Chn>:MARKer<Mk>:REFerence:...
  • Page 734 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ● The expression in the second command refers to formatted trace data. In order to apply it, must be set to CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted:FUNCtion NORMal and must be set to ON. CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted:STATe Trace math for unformatted and formatted trace data can be used at the same time. Suffix: <Chn>...
  • Page 735 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FUNCtion <Mode> CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:FORMatted:FUNCtion <Mode> Defines a simple mathematical trace based on the active trace and its active memory trace. The first command applies to raw, unformatted trace data (complex data), the second to formatted trace data. Both methods can be combined. To apply the trace math, the corresponding mathematical mode must be switched on using and/or...
  • Page 736 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:MATH:MEMorize Copies the current state of the active data trace to a memory trace. If a mathematical trace is active, the data trace associated with the mathematical trace is copied. The memory trace is named Mem<n>[<Data_Trace>] where <n> counts all data and memory traces in the active recall set in chronological order, and <Data_Trace>...
  • Page 737 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:MATH:MEM Copy the current state of the default trace 'Trc1' to a memory trace named 'Mem2[Trc1]'. The memory trace is not dis- played. CALC:MATH:SDEF 'Trc1 / Mem2[Trc1]' Define a mathematical trace, dividing the complex data trace by the stored complex memory trace.
  • Page 738 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ................738 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:CATalog? ............... 738 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:CATalog:SENDed? ..............739 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DEFine:SGRoup ................740 CALCulate<Chn>:PARameter:COPY ................740 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete .................741 CALCulate:PARameter:DELete:ALL ...............741 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete:CALL ..............742 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete:CMEMory ................742 CALCulate:PARameter:DELete:MEMory ..............742 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete:SGRoup ................742 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure ............... 743 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure:SENDed ................743 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine ..............746 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine:SENDed...
  • Page 739 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Usage: Query only CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DEFine:SGRoup <LogicalPort1>[, <LogicalPort2>]... Creates the traces for all S-parameters associated with a group of logical ports (S- parameter group). The traces can be queried using CALCulate<Ch>:DATA:SGRoup? Traces must be selected to become active traces; see CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter: SELect.
  • Page 740 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: CALC2:PAR:DEF:SGR 1,2 Create channel 2 and four traces to measure the two-port S- parameters S . The traces are not displayed. DISP:WIND:TRAC2:FEED 'Ch2_SG_S11' DISP:WIND:TRAC3:FEED 'Ch2_SG_S12' DISP:WIND:TRAC4:FEED 'Ch2_SG_S21' DISP:WIND:TRAC5:FEED 'Ch2_SG_S22' Display the four traces in the diagram no. 1. INIT2:CONT OFF;...
  • Page 741 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. Setting parameters: <TraceName> Trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. See "Rules for trace names" in Chap- ter 5.5.1.3, "Trace Manager dialog", on page 280. Example: CALCulate4:PARameter:SDEFine 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S CALCulate4:PAR:CAT? Query the traces assigned to channel 4.
  • Page 742 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete:CMEMory Deletes all memory traces in channel <Ch>. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Usage: Event CALCulate:PARameter:DELete:MEMory Deletes all memory traces in all channels. Usage: Event Manual operation: "Delete All Mem" on page 286 CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DELete:SGRoup Deletes a group of logical ports (S-parameter group), previously defined via CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:DEFine:SGRoup.
  • Page 743 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <TraceName> Trace name, string variable, e.g. 'Trc4'. See "Rules for trace names" in "Table Area" on page 281. Trace names must be unique across all channels and diagrams. <Result> Measurement parameter (string variable); see Table 7-4.
  • Page 744 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Note: To display the trace defined via CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine, cre- ate a diagram (DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>][:STATe] ON) and assign the trace to this diagram (DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED); see example below. changes the measurement result of an CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:MEASure existing trace. To select an existing trace as the active trace, use CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter: SELect.
  • Page 745 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference 'S11' | 'S12' | ... | 'S0101' | ... Single-ended S-parameters S<i><j> for logical (DUT) ports <i> and <j>. To avoid ambiguities, <i> and <j> must be specified with the same number of digits.
  • Page 746 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference *) Selecting a parameter Y...<n><m> or Z...<n><m> sets the range of port numbers to be considered for the Y and Z-parameter measurement to <n>:<m>. CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine:SENDed <TraceName>, <Result> Creates a trace and assigns a channel number, a name and a measurement parame- ter to it.
  • Page 747 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference 7.3.1.9 CALCulate:RIPPle... The CALCulate:RIPPle... commands define the ripple limits and control the ripple limit check..................747 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:CLEar ..............747 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:CONTrol:DOMain ..................748 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DATA ................749 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DELete:ALL ............... 749 CALCulate:RIPPle:DISPlay:RESult:ALL[:STATe] ............... 750 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DISPlay[:STATe] ..................750 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:FAIL? ..................750 CALCulate:RIPPle:FAIL:ALL? ..............751 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:RDOMain:FORMat ..............751...
  • Page 748 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Setting parameters: <SweepType> FLIN | FLOG | FSEG | FSINgle | TLIN | TLOG | PLIN | PLOG | PSINgle Keywords for the units of the stimulus values; frequency, power, and time units. The selected unit must be compatible with the sweep type (see on page 1038): Hz for FLIN, [SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE...
  • Page 749 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference The unit of a stimulus value is adjusted to the sweep type of the active channel ([SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE), the unit of a rip- ple limit is adjusted to the format of the active trace (CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat).
  • Page 750 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DISPlay[:STATe] <Boolean> Displays or hides all ripple limit lines (including all ranges) associated to the active trace. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - ripple limit line on or off. *RST: Example: *RST;...
  • Page 751 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Ripple Check" on page 327 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:RDOMain:FORMat <UnitRef> Deletes the existing ripple limit ranges and (re-)defines the physical unit of the ripple limit. The units of the stimulus values are defined via CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle: CONTrol:DOMain.
  • Page 752 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:SEGMent<Seg>:LIMit <Limit> Defines the ripple limit for ripple limit range no. <Seg>. A range must be created first to enable this command (e.g. CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DATA). See Chapter 4.4.1.2, "Rules for ripple test definition", on page 129. Tip: To define several ripple limit ranges with a single command, use CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:DATA.
  • Page 753 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST; CALC:RIPP:DATA 1, 1500000000, 2000000000, Define and enable a ripple limit range in the stimulus range between 1.5 GHz and 2 GHz, assigning a ripple limit of +3 dB. CALC:RIPP:STAT ON; SEGM:RES? Enable the limit check and query the result for the created range.
  • Page 754 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <StimValue> Stimulus values (unitless) confining the ripple limit range. The unit is adjusted to the sweep type of the active channel ([SENSe<Ch>:]SWEep:TYPE). Range: Virtually no restriction for ripple limit ranges. *RST: n/a (no ripple limit line defined after a reset) Default unit: NN *RST;...
  • Page 755 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Ripple Check" on page 327 CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle:STATe:AREA <HorizontalPos>, <VerticalPos> Moves the ripple test info field for the active trace <Chn> to one of nine predefined positions in the active diagram. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <HorizontalPos>...

  • Page 756: Calculate:Statistics:domain:user

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER <EvalRange> Selects one out of 10 evaluation ranges to be configured with the CALCulate<Chn>: STATistics:DOMain:USER:SHOW, CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain: USER:STARt, and com- CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER:STOP mands. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <EvalRange>...

  • Page 757: Calculate:Statistics:epdelay[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Stop> Start or stop value of the evaluation range. Default unit: NN Example: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:DOMain:USER Manual operation: "Evaluation Range" on page 305 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:EPDelay[:STATe] <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:MMPTpeak[:STATe] <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:MSTDdev[:STATe] <Boolean> These commands display or hide the "Phase/El Length" results, the "Min/Max/Peak- Peak"...

  • Page 758: Calculate:Statistics:nlinear:comp:reference

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference to retrieve the CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RESult? compression results. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: dBValue Compression value Example: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP: RESult? Manual operation: "Compr. Point / Compr. Val." on page 302 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:PHASe <PhaseValue>...

  • Page 759: Calculate:Statistics:nlinear:comp:rlevel

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER:SHOW <Boolean> Displays or hides range limit lines for the reference range selected via CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RDOMain:USER. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF – reference range limit lines on or off. *RST: Manual operation: "Ref.

  • Page 760: Calculate:Statistics:nlinear:comp:rphase

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Reference Value" on page 303 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RESult? Returns the compression point of an S-parameter or ratio measured in a power sweep. For dB formatted traces, the compression value x is set via CALCulate<Chn>: STATistics:NLINear:COMP:LEVel, for phase formatted traces it is set via CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:PHASe.

  • Page 761: Calculate:Statistics:nlinear:comp[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Defined Value" on page 304 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:RMARker <Marker> Allows you to select the marker whose value shall be used as the reference ("small sig- nal value") for the compression point calculation. Only applies if is set CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP:REFerence to MARKer.
  • Page 762 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:NLINear:COMP: RESult? Manual operation: "Compr. Point / Compr. Val." on page 302 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:RESult? <Result> Returns a single statistical parameter of the trace no. <Chn> or all parameters. It is not necessary to display the info field (CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics[:STATe] before using this command.

  • Page 763: Calculate:Statistics:rms[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Min/Max/Peak-Peak, Mean/Std Dev/RMS" on page 300 CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:RMS[:STATe] <Boolean> CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics:SFLatness[:STATe] <Boolean> These commands display or hide the "RMS" and the "Flatness/Gain/Slope" results in the diagram area of trace no. <Chn>. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean>...
  • Page 764 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:STATistics[:STATe]:AREA <HorizontalPos>, <VerticalPos> Moves the statistics info field for the active trace <Chn> to one of nine predefined posi- tions in the active diagram. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <HorizontalPos>...
  • Page 765 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference See also CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:STARt CALCulate<Chn>: TRANsform:DTFault:STOP. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. Parameters: <Center>/<Span> Center/span value. Default unit: m Example: :CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:CENTer 2; SPAN 2 Defines the DtF distance window of the active trace of channel 1 via its center (2m) and span (2m).
  • Page 766 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Options: R&S ZND-K3 Manual operation: "Add / Delete" on page 535 Table 7-5: Example: frequency-dependent attenuation table Frequency Attenuation 1 GHz 0.01 dB/m 2 GHz 0.015 dB/m 3 GHz 0.012 dB/m CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:DELete <DtfDeleteCable> Deletes the user-defined cable type with the given name.
  • Page 767 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:DATA<FaultNo> If the active trace of channel <Chn> is a Distance to Fault (DtF) trace and DtF limit checking is enabled, this query returns the peak data of DtF limit violation <FaultNo> <FaultNo> must be between 1 and CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK: COUNt?.
  • Page 768 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <PeakThreshold> Fault limit *RST: -20 dB Default unit: dB Example: *RST; :CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:STATe ON makes the active trace of channel 1 a DtF trace. CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:PEAK:THReshold -30 sets the DtF limit to -30 dB.
  • Page 769 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:DTFault:SELect <DtfSelectCable> Selects one of the available (predefined or user-defined) cable types for Distance to Fault measurements. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace. Parameters: <DtfSelectCable> Name of the cable type. Example: CALCulate1:TRANsform:DTFault:SELect '5088-HFLR' Selects cable type "5088-HFLR".
  • Page 770 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Options: R&S ZND-K3 Manual operation: "Distance to Fault" on page 530 CALCulate:TRANsform:TIME... The CALCulate:TRANsform:TIME... commands control the transformation into the time domain (see Chapter 4.7.5, "Time domain analysis", on page 203)..............770 CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:CENTer ............
  • Page 771 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:DCHebyshev <SidebandSupp> Sets the sideband suppression for the Dolph-Chebyshev window. The command is only available if a Dolph-Chebyshev window is active (CALCulate<Chn>: TRANsform:TIME:WINDow DCHebyshev). Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <SidebandSupp>...
  • Page 772 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <DCValue> DC value of the measured quantity Range: Depending on the measured quantity (-1 to +1 for S-parameters) *RST: Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT ON Reset the instrument, activating a frequency sweep with S measured quantity, and enable the time domain transformation for the default trace.
  • Page 773 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam:EXTRapolate Extrapolates the measured trace towards f = 0 and overwrites the current DC value (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam). The command is rele- vant for low pass time domain transforms. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Example: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:LPASs:DCSParam Usage:...
  • Page 774 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Span> Time span of the diagram in time domain. Range: 2E-012 s to 200 s. Increment: 0.1 ns *RST: 5E-009 s Default unit: s Example: CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:CENTer Manual operation: "Time Start / Time Stop / Time Center / Time Span" on page 362 Note: If the x-axis is scaled in distance units (CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:...
  • Page 775 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON - time domain representation active. OFF - frequency domain representation active. *RST: Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:TIME:STAT? Reset the instrument, activating a frequency sweep, and query whether the default trace is displayed in the time domain. The response is 0.
  • Page 776 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME[:TYPE] <TransformType> Selects the time domain transformation type. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <TransformType> BPASs | LPASs BPASs - band pass impulse (only impulse response; a step response CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:TIME:STIMulus STEP is automatically changed to impulse response)
  • Page 777 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Unit> TIME | DISTance TIME - x-axis scaled in time units. DISTance - x-axis scaled in distance units (Distance = Time * c * Velocity Factor).
  • Page 778 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram Serial L, shunt L Shunt L, serial C Shunt C, serial L Shunt C, serial C Shunt L, serial L SHLC Shunt L, shunt C Serial C, shunt L Serial L, shunt C User Manual 1173.9557.02 ─...
  • Page 779 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram Serial C, shunt C Shunt C, serial L Shunt L, serial C Shunt C, serial C Table 7-7: Circuit models for balanced port (and port pair) de-/embedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import, generic 4-port (.s4p, no circuit model)
  • Page 780 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram SLST Shunt L, serial Touchstone (.s2p) data SCST Shunt C, serial Touchstone (.s2p) data CSSL Serial Cs, shunt L LSSC Serial Ls, shunt C CSSC Serial Cs, shunt C LSSL Serial Ls, shunt L SLCS...
  • Page 781 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram SCCS Shunt C, serial Cs SLLS Shunt L, serial Ls STSG Serial Touchstone (.s2p) data, shunt C SGST Shunt C, serial Touchstone (.s2p) data GSSL Serial Cs, shunt L LSSG Serial Ls, shunt C GSSG...
  • Page 782 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram SGLS Shunt C, serial Ls SGGS Shunt C, serial Cs Table 7-8: Circuit models for port set de-/embedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import, no circuit model STSL, ..., SGGS The models for port pairs (i.e.
  • Page 783 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameter Circuit model Pictogram Shunt C Shunt C Table 7-10: Circuit models for differential match embedding Parameter Circuit model Pictogram FIMPort File import, generic 2-port (no circuit model) SHLC Shunt L, shunt C CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>: ..................
  • Page 784 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:PARameters: ......................792 L<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:PARameters: ......................793 R<Cmp> ....794 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>[:STATe] ..795 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>:TNDefinition CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>: ..................795 PARameters:C<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>: ....................795 PARameters:DATA CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>: ..................796 PARameters:G<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>: ...................797 PARameters:L<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>: ..................797 PARameters:R<Cmp> .... 798 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>[:STATe] ..798 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>:TNDefinition ..........
  • Page 785 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ....... 813 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>[:STATe] ....814 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:TNDefinition ....814 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PSET:DEEMbedding<ListId>:DEFine ....... 814 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PSET:EMBedding<ListId>:DEFine CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>: ..................815 PARameters:C<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>: ....................816 PARameters:DATA CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>: ..................816 PARameters:G<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>: ...................817 PARameters:L<Cmp> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>: ..................818 PARameters:R<Cmp> ..... 819 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>[:STATe] ..819 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:DEEMbedding<PhyPt>:TNDefinition CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>:PARameters: ......................
  • Page 786 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Capacitance> Capacitance C<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -1mF to 1 mF. Increment: 1 fF (1E-15 F) *RST: 1 pF (1E-12 F) Default unit: F Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel> STSC | SCST | CSSL | LSSC | CSSC | SLCS | SCLS | SCCS | STSG | SGST | GSSL | LSSG | GSSG | SLGS | SGLS | SGGS Possible circuit models (character data);...
  • Page 787 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference FPORts (or omitted) Standard port sequence (odd port numbers towards VNA, even port numbers towards DUT) IPORts – Two-port networks: inverted port sequence (network port 2 towards VNA, network port 1 towards DUT) –...
  • Page 788 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>: PARameters:L<Cmp> <CircuitModel>, <Inductance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>: PARameters:L<Cmp>? <CircuitModel> Specifies the inductance value L<Cmp> in the different circuit models for balanced port deembedding. In the query form, the <Inductance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the inductance value for the specified circuit model.
  • Page 789 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) <Cmp> Number of resistance in circuit model. The total number of resis- tances depends on the selected circuit model. Parameters: <Resistance> Resistance R<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -10 MΩ...
  • Page 790 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Active" on page 457 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:DEEMbedding<LogPt>: TNDefinition <CircuitModel> Selects the circuit model for balanced port deembedding. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) Parameters: <CircuitModel> FIMPort | STSL | STSC | SLST | SCST | CSSL | LSSC | CSSC | LSSL | SLCS | SCLS | SCCS | SLLS | STSG | SGST | GSSL | LSSG | GSSG | SLGS | SGLS | SGGS Possible circuit models (character data);...
  • Page 791 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters for setting and query: <CiruitModel> STSC | SCST | CSSL | LSSC | CSSC | SLCS | SCLS | SCCS | STSG | SGST | GSSL | LSSG | GSSG | SLGS | SGLS | SGGS Possible circuit models (character data);...
  • Page 792 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference SGATes Swapped gates (even port numbers towards VNA, odd port numbers towards DUT) SINCreasing Swapped increasing port sequence (high port numbers towards VNA, low port numbers towards DUT) <arg1> <block_data> Content of a Touchstone file (*.s2p or *.s4p) in IEEE488.2 Block data format.
  • Page 793 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference In the query form, the <Inductance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the inductance value for the specified circuit model. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) <Cmp> Number of inductance in circuit model. The total number of inductances depends on the selected circuit model.

  • Page 794: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:balanced:embedding[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Resistance> Resistance R<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -10 MΩ to 10 MΩ. Increment: 1 mΩ (1E-3 Ω) *RST: 0 Ω for all resistances connected in series with an inductance. 10 MΩ for all resistances connected in parallel with a capacitance Default unit: Ω...

  • Page 795: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:differential:embedding

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:BALanced:EMBedding<LogPt>: TNDefinition <CircuitModel> Selects the circuit model for balanced port embedding. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) Parameters: <CircuitModel> FIMPort | STSL | STSC | SLST | SCST | CSSL | LSSC | CSSC | LSSL | SLCS | SCLS | SCCS | SLLS | STSG | SGST | GSSL | LSSG | GSSG | SLGS | SGLS | SGGS Possible circuit models (character data);...

  • Page 796: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:differential:embedding: Parameters:g

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference MMEMory:LOAD:VNETworks<Ch>:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt> load circuit data from a Touchstone file located at the R&S ZND's file system instead. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number of a balanced port Setting parameters: <Interchange> FPORts | IPORts | SGATes FPORts (or omitted) Standard port sequence (network port 1 towards VNA, network port 2 towards DUT)

  • Page 797: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:differential:embedding: Parameters:l

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>: PARameters:L<Cmp> <CircuitModel>[, <Inductance>] Specifies the inductance value L in the "Shunt L, Shunt C" lumped element model for differential match embedding. In the query form, the <Inductance> parameter must be omitted. Suffix: <Ch>...

  • Page 798: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:fsimulator[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:DIFFerential:EMBedding<LogPt>[: STATe] <Boolean> Enables or disables differential match embedding for balanced port <LogPt>. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <LogPt> Logical port number (balanced port) Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - embedding active or inactive *RST: Manual operation: "Active"...

  • Page 799: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:gloop:deembedding:parameters:c

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding:PARameters:C <CircuitModel>, <Capacitance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding:PARameters:C? <CircuitModel> Specifies the capacitance value C in the different circuit models for ground loop embedding. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Parameters: <Capacitance> Capacitance C for ground loop deembedding. Range: -1mF to 1 mF. Increment: 1 fF (1E-15 F) *RST: 1 pF (1E-12 F)

  • Page 800: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:gloop:deembedding:parameters:l

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding:PARameters:L <CircuitModel>, <Inductance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding:PARameters:L? <CircuitModel> Specifies the inductance value in the different circuit models for ground loop deembed- ding. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. Parameters: <Inductance> Inductance L for ground loop deembedding. Range: -1 H to 1 H. Increment: 1 pH (1E-12 H) *RST: 1 nH (1E-9 H)

  • Page 801: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:gloop:deembedding[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel> SL | SC Possible circuit models (character data); see Table 7-9. Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:DEEM:PAR:R? SC; R? SL Query the default resistances for ground loop deembedding. The response is 10000000; 0. CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:DEEM:PAR:R SC, 2.2E+3 Increase the resistance for the Shunt C model to 2.2 kΩ.

  • Page 802: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:gloop:embedding:parameters:c

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding:PARameters:C <CircuitModel>, <Capacitance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding:PARameters:C? <CircuitModel> Specifies the capacitance value C in the different circuit models for ground loop embedding. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. Parameters: <Capacitance> Capacitance C for ground loop embedding. Range: -1mF to 1 mF. Increment: 1 fF (1E-15 F) *RST: 1 pF (1E-12 F)

  • Page 803: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:gloop:embedding:parameters:l

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding:PARameters:L <CircuitModel>, <Inductance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:EMBedding:PARameters:L? <CircuitModel> Specifies the inductance value in the different circuit models for ground loop embed- ding. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. Parameters: <Inductance> Inductance L for ground loop embedding. Range: -1H to 1 H. Increment: 1 pH (1E-12 H) *RST: 1 nH (1E-9 H)

  • Page 804: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:gloop:embedding[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel> SL | SC Possible circuit models (character data); see Table 7-9. Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:EMB:PAR:R? SC; R? SL Query the default resistances for ground loop embedding. The response is 10000000; 0. CALC:TRAN:VNET:GLO:EMB:PAR:R SC, 2.2E+3 Increase the resistance for the Shunt C model to 2.2 kΩ.

  • Page 805: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:gloop:group

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:GROup <Boolean> If set to ON (1), each port group (defined using SOURce<Ch>:GROup<Grp>:PPORts) has its own ground loop embedding and deembedding network. Otherwise the same embedding network and deembedding network is used for all active ports. See the CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:GLOop:DEEMbedding<group>:...

  • Page 806: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:deembedding:Parameters: C<1|2|3

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Example: CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir: DEEMbedding<ListId>[:STATe] Usage: Event Manual operation: "Add / Delete" on page 455 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: PARameters:C<1|2|3> <CircuitModel>, <Capacitance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: PARameters:C<1|2|3>? <CircuitModel> Specifies the capacitance value C<i> in the different lumped circuit models for port pair deembedding.

  • Page 807: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:deembedding:Parameters: G<1|2|3

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: PARameters:G<1|2|3> <CircuitModel>, <Conductance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: PARameters:G<1|2|3>? <CircuitModel> Specifies the conductance value G<i> in the different lumped circuit models for port pair deembedding. In the query form, the <Conductance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the conductance value for the specified circuit model.

  • Page 808: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:deembedding:Parameters: R<1|2|3

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <1|2|3> Index i of the inductance L<i> in the related lumped circuit model. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1. Parameters: <Inductance> Inductance L<i> Range: -1 H to 1 H. Increment: 1 pH (1E-12 H) *RST: 1 nH (1E-9 H) Default unit: H...

  • Page 809: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:deembedding[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Network" on page 487 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>[:STATe] <arg0> Enables or disables the deembedding function for port set (or port pair) <ListId>. It is allowed to change the deembedding network while embedding is enabled. Suffix: <Ch>...

  • Page 810: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:embedding:Define

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Network" on page 487 CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:DEFine <PP_First>,<PP_Second>,<PP_First>,... Creates one or more port pairs for port set embedding. The command can be used repeatedly to extend or (partially) overwrite the list of port sets for embedding. CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PSET:EMBedding<ListId>: for general port set definition.
  • Page 811 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: C<1|2|3> <CircuitModel>, <Capacitance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:PARameters: C<1|2|3>? <CircuitModel> Specifies the capacitance value C<i> in the different lumped circuit models for port pair embedding. In the query form, the <Capacitance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the capacitance value for the specified circuit model.
  • Page 812 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <ListId> Index of the affected port pair (see CALCulate<Ch>: TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: DEFine) <1|2|3> Index i of the inductance L<i> in the related lumped circuit model. If unspecified the numeric suffix is set to 1. Parameters: <Inductance>...

  • Page 813: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:embedding[:State]

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters for setting and query: <arg0> STSL | STSC | SLST | SCST | CSSL | LSSC | CSSC | LSSL | SLCS | SCLS | SCCS | SLLS | GSSL | LSSG | SLGS | SGLS Circuit model whose resistance R<i>...

  • Page 814: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:ppair:embedding:Tndefinition

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <ListId> Index of the affected port set (see CALCulate<Ch>: TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>: DEFine) Parameters: <Boolean> OFF (0): Embedding inactive ON (1): Embedding active *RST: OFF (0) Example: *RST; CALC:TRAN:VNET:PPA:EMB:DEF 1,2,3,4 Define a port pair configuration with port pairs (1,2) and (3,4). CALC:TRAN:VNET:PPA:EMB1:TND CSSL Select the Serial Cs, shunt L circuit model for the first port pair.

  • Page 815: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:sended:deembedding

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Note that port pairs (i.e. 2-element port sets) can also be created using CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: DEFine CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir: EMBedding<ListId>:DEFine. CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding:DELete CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:EMBedding<ListId>:DELete on page 810 to delete all port sets (including port pairs). Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <ListId>...

  • Page 816: Calculate:Transform:vnetworks:sended:deembedding: Parameters:data

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:PAR:C2? CSC Query the default capacitance C2 for the Serial C, shunt C cir- cuit model. The response is 1E-012 (1 pF). CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:PAR:C2 CSC, 2.2E-12 Increase the capacitance to 2.2 pF. Manual operation: "Network"...
  • Page 817 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <PhyPt> Physical port number <Cmp> Number of the conductance component in the circuit model. The total number of conductances depends on the selected circuit model. Parameters: <Conductance> Conductance G<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -1kS to 1 kS.
  • Page 818 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Inductance> Inductance L<Cmp> for the specified circuit model. Range: -1H to 1 H. Increment: 1 pH (1E-12 H) *RST: 1 nH (1E-9 H) Default unit: H Parameters for setting and query: <CircuitModel> CSL | LSC | LSL | SLC | SCL | SLL | SHLC | GSL | LSG | SLG | Possible circuit models (character data);...
  • Page 819 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:PAR:R1? CSL; R2? CSL Query the default resistances for the Serial C, shunt L circuit model. The response is 10000000; 0. CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:DEEM:PAR:R2 CSL, 2.2E+3 Increase the resistance R2 to 2.2 kΩ. Manual operation: "Network"...
  • Page 820 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:C<Cmp> <CircuitModel>, <Capacitance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:C<Cmp>? <CircuitModel> Specifies the capacitance value C<Cmp> in the different circuit models for single ended port embedding. In the query form, the <Capacitance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the capacitance value for the specified circuit model.
  • Page 821 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number <PhyPt> Physical port number Setting parameters: <Interchange> FPORts | IPORts | SGATes FPORts (or omitted) Standard port sequence (network port 1 towards VNA, network port 2 towards DUT) IPORts | SGATes Inverted port sequence (network port 2 towards VNA, network port 1 towards DUT) <arg1>...
  • Page 822 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:EMB:PAR:L? SHLC; R? SHLC; C? SHLC; G? SHLC Query the default component values for the "shunt L, shunt C" circuit model. CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:EMB:PAR:G SHLC, 1 Increase the conductance G to 1 Siemens. Manual operation: "Network"...
  • Page 823 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:R<Cmp> <CircuitModel>, <Resistance> CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:SENDed:EMBedding<PhyPt>: PARameters:R<Cmp>? <CircuitModel> Specifies the resistance value R<Cmp> in the different circuit models for single ended port embedding. In the query form, the <Resistance> parameter must be omitted. The command returns the resistance value for the specified circuit model.
  • Page 824 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON - embedding active OFF - embedding inactive *RST: Example: CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:EMB:TND CSL Select the Serial C, shunt L circuit model for embedding. CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:EMB:PAR:R2 CSL, 2.2E+3; : CALC:TRAN:VNET:SEND:EMB ON Increase the resistance R2 for the Serial C, shunt L circuit model to 2.2 kΩ...
  • Page 825 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate:TRANsform... (other) CALCulate<Chn>:TRANsform:COMPlex <Result> Converts S-parameters into converted (matched-circuit) Y-parameters or Z-parameters and vice versa, assuming that port no. i is terminated with Z so that the three parame- ter sets are equivalent and the following formulas apply: Suffix: <Chn>...
  • Page 826 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference 7.3.1.12 CALCulate... (other) ....................826 CALCulate:CLIMits:FAIL? ....................826 CALCulate<Chn>:DLINe ..................827 CALCulate<Chn>:DLINe:STATe ....................827 CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat ................828 CALCulate<Chn>:FORMat:WQUType ................829 CALCulate<Chn>:GDAPerture:SCOunt .................. 829 CALCulate<Chn>:IAVerage:MODE ................. 830 CALCulate<Chn>:IAVerage[:STATe] ....................830 CALCulate<Chn>:PHOLd ..................830 CALCulate:PIPelining:DATA? ................831 CALCulate<Chn>:SMOothing:APERture ................832 CALCulate<Chn>:SMOothing[:STATe] ....................832 CALCulate:TDVSwr[:STATe] CALCulate:CLIMits:FAIL?
  • Page 827 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:DLIN 10 Define the position of the horizontal line in the default dB Mag diagram at +10 dB. CALC:DLIN:STAT ON Display the defined horizontal line. Manual operation: "Response Value" on page 335 CALCulate<Chn>:DLINe:STATe <Boolean>...
  • Page 828 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "dB Mag" on page 266 Assume that the result at a sweep point is given by the complex quantity z = x + jy. Then the magnitude of z is calculated as |z| = sqrt(x and in phase notation we have j Phase(z)
  • Page 829 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Unit> POWer | VOLTage Power or voltage units *RST: POWer CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'b1' Example: Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the wave quantity b . The trace becomes the active trace in channel CALC4:FORM:WQUT VOLT Select voltage units for the created trace (identified by the suffix Manual operation:...
  • Page 830 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Mode" on page 309 CALCulate<Chn>:IAVerage[:STATe] <Boolean> Turns infinite averaging on or off. The averaging mode can be selected using CALCulate<Chn>:IAVerage:MODE. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean>...
  • Page 831 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Note: ● Because this query blocks the parser thread and the GUI thread until measurement data is available, a timeout error -365 is returned after 10 seconds wait time. ● If no more data are available, the query returns an execution error -200 Query parameters: <DutId>...

  • Page 832: Configure Commands

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Chn>:SMOothing[:STATe] <Boolean> Enables or disables smoothing for trace no. <Chn>. Suffix: <Chn> Channel number used to identify the active trace Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - smoothing on or off. *RST: Example: CALCulate<Chn>:SMOothing:APERture Manual operation: "Smoothing"...

  • Page 833: Configure:channel:catalog

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CONFigure:CHANnel:CATalog? Returns the numbers and names of all channels in the current recall set. The response is a string containing a comma-separated list of channel numbers and names; see example below. If all channels have been deleted the response is an empty string (""). *RST;...
  • Page 834 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Note that the optimization can only be applied, if all channels in the current setup are in single sweep mode (INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous OFF, and if there is no ongoing sweep sequence. Any change in the current setup or a wrong sweep sequence lets the analyzer fall back to unoptimized channel switching.
  • Page 835 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Ch> Number of an existing channel. Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF *RST: ON (all existing channels) Example: *RST; :CONFigure:CHANnel2 ON; CHANnel3 ON Create channels 2 and 3, in addition to the default channel no. 1.

  • Page 836: Configure:channel:Name

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Usage: Query only Manual operation: "Table Area" on page 281 CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>[:STATe] <Boolean> Creates channel no. <Ch> and/or sets it as the active channel, or deletes channel <Ch>. Suffix: <Ch> Number of the channel to be created or deleted. Parameters: <Boolean>...

  • Page 837: Configure:channel:Trace:rename

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CONFigure:CHANnel<Ch>:TRACe:REName <TraceName> Assigns a (new) name to the active trace in channel <Ch>. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Setting parameters: <TraceName> Trace name, e.g. 'Trace 4'. Example: *RST; :CONF:CHAN:TRAC:REN 'Testtrace_1' Reset the analyzer to create a default trace in channel 1 and set this trace as the active trace.

  • Page 838: Configure:trace:Channel:name

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST; :CALC2:PAR:SDEF 'Ch2Trc2', 'S11' Create channel 2 and a new trace named Ch2Trc2. CONF:TRAC:CAT? Query all traces and their names. As a default trace no. 1 is cre- ated upon *RST, the response is '1,Trc1,2,Ch2Trc2'. CONF:CHAN1:TRAC:CAT? Query the channels in channel no.

  • Page 839: Configure:trace:Name

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: CONFigure:TRACe:CATalog? Usage: Query only Manual operation: "New Channel" on page 443 CONFigure:TRACe<Trc>:NAME <TraceName> Assigns a name to an existing trace number <Trc>. Note that it is not possible to assign the same name to two different traces. returns CONFigure:TRACe:CATalog? a list of all traces in the active recall set with their names.

  • Page 840: Configure:trace:window:trace

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Usage: Setting only Manual operation: "Table Area" on page 281 CONFigure:TRACe:WINDow? <TraceName> Returns the trace number within a diagram which is assigned to the trace <TraceName> is assigned to. A zero is returned when the trace is not assigned/ displayed.

  • Page 841: Control Commands

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference 7.3.3 CONTrol commands The Control... commands allow you to configure the following interfaces: ● USER PORT ● Handler I/O connector (Universal Interface, option R&S ZN-B14).................... 841 CONTrol:AUXiliary:C[:DATA] .................... 843 CONTrol:HANDler:A[:DATA] .................... 843 CONTrol:HANDler:B[:DATA] ....................843 CONTrol:HANDler:C[:DATA]...
  • Page 842 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ● The signals at the USER PORT connector reflect the channel bits of the measur- ing channel, i.e. the channel for which the analyzer performs a sweep. This chan- nel is not necessarily identical with the active channel. ●...
  • Page 843 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CONTrol:HANDler:A[:DATA] <DecValue> CONTrol:HANDler:B[:DATA] <DecValue> CONTrol:HANDler:C[:DATA] <DecValue> CONTrol:HANDler:D[:DATA] <DecValue> CONTrol:HANDler:E[:DATA] <DecValue> CONTrol:HANDler:F[:DATA] <DecValue> CONTrol:HANDler:G[:DATA] <DecValue> CONTrol:HANDler:H[:DATA] <DecValue> The setting commands write data to ports A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H. To write data to a port, the port must be configured as an output port (see example).

  • Page 844: Control:handler:a[:Data]

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CONTrol:HANDler:C:MODE <Mode> CONTrol:HANDler:D:MODE <Mode> Controls the direction of the data flow at ports A, B, C, D. The direction at the com- bined ports E, F, G, H is according to the configuration at the other ports. Parameters: <Mode>...

  • Page 845: Control:handler[:Extension]:Index:state

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: CONTrol:HANDler[:EXTension]:INDex:STATe CONTrol:HANDler:INPut? Queries whether a high to low transition occurred at the /INPUT 1 line (pin 2) of the Universal Interface since the last CONTrol:HANDler:INPut? query. The query resets the counter to zero. A negative pulse fed to this line also causes the /OUTPUT 1 and /OUTPUT 2 lines (pins 3 and 4) to change to low.

  • Page 846: Control:handler:output[:Data]

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Pt> Output port number: 1 - /OUTPUT1 (pin 3) 2 - /OUTPUT2 (pin 4) The parameters MIN, MAX, DEF are not supported. Note:*RST or "Preset" do not change the configuration of the Universal Interface.

  • Page 847: Control:handler:passfail:mode

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Logic> POSitive | NEGative POSitive – high (+5V) means PASS, low (0V) means FAIL NEGative – low means PASS, high means FAIL Note:*RST or "Preset" do not change the configuration of the Universal Interface.

  • Page 848: Control:handler:passfail:policy

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CONTrol:HANDler:PASSfail:POLicy <Policy> Specifies how the global pass/fail status (CONTrol:HANDler:PASSfail:STATus? on page 848) is calculated. Parameters: <Policy> ALLTests | ALLMeas ALLTests – the status is PASS if all limit checks in all measure- ments (traces) pass. ALLMeas –...

  • Page 849: Control:handler:reset

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Return values: <Status> PASS | FAIL | NONE PASS – all measurements that are not in single sweep mode (on hold) have been swept, and all limit checks have been passed. FAIL – all measurements that are not in single sweep mode (on hold) have been swept, at least one limit check failed according to the specified pass/fail policy (CONTrol:HANDler:...

  • Page 850: Diagnostic Commands

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference 7.3.4 DIAGnostic commands The DIAGnostic... commands provide access to service and diagnostic routines used in service, maintenance and repair. In accordance with the SCPI standard, all commands are device-specific. Service functions are password-protected (SYSTem:PASSword[:CENable]) and are intended for Rohde &...
  • Page 851 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference DIAGnostic:PRODuct:OPTion:INFO? <Option>, <Detail> Queries a property of an installed software option, identified by its name. Query parameters: <Option> Option name, e.g. 'ZND-K2'. <Detail> DESCription | TYPE | ACTivation | EXPiration | KEY You can query for an option's DESCription, its KEY and key TYPE, and its ACTivation and EXPiration date (if applicable).

  • Page 852: Display Commands

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference 7.3.5 DISPlay commands The DISPlay... commands control the selection and presentation of graphical and trace information on the screen. Trace display Traces are identified by a string parameter defining the trace name (e.g. <TraceName>).
  • Page 853 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ....................860 DISPlay:LAYout:DEFine ....................860 DISPlay:LAYout:EXECute .....................861 DISPlay:LAYout:GRID ..................... 862 DISPlay:LAYout:JOIN ....................862 DISPlay:LAYout:OVERlay ..................... 862 DISPlay:LAYout:SPLit ................862 DISPlay:MENU:KEY:ACTion:CATalog? ..................863 DISPlay:MENU:KEY:EXECute ....................863 DISPlay:MENU:KEY:SELect ................863 DISPlay:MENU:KEY:TOOL:CATalog? ......................863 DISPlay:RFSize ................864 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:CATalog? ................864 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:MAXimize ..................
  • Page 854 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Trace Info" on page 544 DISPlay:ANNotation:FREQuency[:STATe] <Boolean> Unmasks or masks all stimulus values in the VNA GUI for the active recall set. Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - unmask or mask stimulus values *RST: ON - all stimulus values unmasked Example:...
  • Page 855 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON - the limit line colors are defined via DISPlay:CMAP<DispEl>:RGB where <DispEl> = 9 ... 12. The limit line colors are independent of the trace colors. OFF - all limit lines have the color of the associated trace. *RST: n/a (a *RST does not affect the setting).
  • Page 856 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <Green> Green content of the defined color. Range: 0 (zero intensity, corresponding to a 0 in the 24-bit color model) to 1 (full intensity, corresponding to 255 in the 24-bit color model). <Blue> Blue content of the defined color.
  • Page 857 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <DispEl> Display Element Vertical Range Lines Diagram Title Limit Fail Trace Color Limit Line Type Off Limit Line Type Upper Limit Line Type Lower 13 to 12+N Trace properties 1 to N, where N is the number of trace colors configured using SYSTem:DISPlay:TRACes:CCOunt DISPlay:CMAP:TRACe:COLor[:STATe] <Boolean>...
  • Page 858 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <TraceName> Trace name, string parameter <Red> Red content of the defined color. Range: 0 (zero intensity, corresponding to a 0 in the 24-bit color model) to 1 (full intensity, corresponding to 255 in the 24-bit color model). <Green>...
  • Page 859 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Mk> Marker number. Parameters: <Boolean> 0 – Marker <Mk> of trace <TraceName> is displayed 1 – Marker <Mk> of trace <TraceName> is hidden Setting parameters: <TraceName> Name of the related trace. Manual operation: "Content Selection"...
  • Page 860 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference DISPlay:LAYout:DEFine <LayoutId>, <LayoutFormatMode>, <LayoutData> DISPlay:LAYout:DEFine? <LayoutId> Creates a horizontal or vertical display layout and provides it with an identifier (<Layou- tId>). Layouts are defined row by row (horizontal layouts) or column by column (vertical lay- outs).
  • Page 861 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference The executable format is an extension of the easy format used by DISPlay:LAYout: DEFine. ● The <LayoutData> string consists of two parts: <LayoutData> = '(<StartFor- mat>,<RepeatFormat >,<Repeat Format > ...). The <StartFormat> descriptor dis- tinguishes between horizontal and vertical layouts and defines the number of rows or columns.
  • Page 862 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference DISPlay:LAYout:JOIN <MainLayoutId>, <DiagramNumber>, <SubLayoutId> Creates a nested layout, inserting a sub-layout into one of the diagrams of a main lay- out. Main layout and sub-layout must be defined previously, preferably using DISPlay:LAYout:DEFine. Note: The maximum number of joined levels within a layout is 16. Setting parameters: <MainLayoutId>...
  • Page 863 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference DISPlay:MENU:KEY:EXECute <MenuKey> Opens the dialog identified by <MenuKey>. to display the available opener IDs. DISPlay:MENU:KEY:ACTion:CATalog? Note that no error is generated if a valid <MenuKey> is specified but the dialog cannot be opended for any other reason. Setting parameters: <MenuKey>...
  • Page 864 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <RelFontSize> Relative font size Range: 80 % to 170 % *RST: 100 % Default unit: percent Example: *RST; :DISP:RFS 80 Use smaller fonts to gain more space for the traces in the dia- gram.
  • Page 865 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Wnd> Number of the diagram area to become the active diagram area. DISPlay:WINDow<Wnd>:MAXimize acts on all diagrams of the current recall set, however, the diagram no. <Wnd> is dis- played on top of the others. Parameters: <Boolean>...
  • Page 866 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>][:STATe] <Boolean> Creates or deletes a diagram area, identified by its area number <Wnd>. Suffix: <Wnd> Number of the diagram area to be created or deleted. Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - creates or deletes diagram area no. <Wnd>. *RST: Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11'...
  • Page 867 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - displays or hides the title. *RST: Example: DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TITLe:DATA Manual operation: "Show Title" on page 539 DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:CATalog? Returns the numbers and names of all traces in diagram area no. <Wnd>. Suffix: <Wnd>...
  • Page 868 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe:EFEed <TraceName> Assigns an existing trace (CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine <TraceName>) to a diagram area <Wnd>, and displays the trace. Use DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]: to assign the trace to a diagram area using a numeric suffix TRACe<WndTr>:FEED (e.g. in order to use the DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y:OFFSet command).
  • Page 869 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <TraceName> String parameter for the trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create diagram area no. 2. DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1' Display the generated trace in diagram area no.
  • Page 870 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: DALL – all data traces <TraceName> MALL – all memory traces <string> – single trace identified by its trace name (string param- eter), e.g. 'Trc4'. ON | OFF – display or hide traces. <Boolean>...
  • Page 871 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:Y:OFFSet <MagnitudeFactor>[, <PhaseFactor>[, <RealPart>[, <ImaginaryPart>]]] Modifies all points of the trace <WndTr> by means of an added and/or a multiplied complex constant. The response values M of the trace are transformed according to: Suffix: <Wnd>...
  • Page 872 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <WndTr> Existing trace number, assigned by means of DISPlay[: WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:FEED. This suffix is ignored if the optional <TraceName> parameter is used. Setting parameters: <Activate> ONCE Activate the autoscale function. <TraceName> Optional string parameter for the trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. If this optional parameter is present, both numeric suffixes are ignored (trace names must be unique across different channels and win- dows).
  • Page 873 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <TraceName> Optional string parameter for the trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. If this optional parameter is present, both numeric suffixes are ignored (trace names must be unique across different channels and win- dows). Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S...
  • Page 874 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create diagram area no. 2. DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1' Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace number 9 to it.
  • Page 875 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create diagram area no. 2. DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1' Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace number 9 to it.
  • Page 876 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: CALC4:PAR:SDEF 'Ch4Tr1', 'S11' Create channel 4 and a trace named Ch4Tr1 to measure the input reflection coefficient S DISP:WIND2:STAT ON Create diagram area no. 2. DISP:WIND2:TRAC9:FEED 'CH4TR1' Display the generated trace in diagram area no. 2, assigning the trace number 9 to it.
  • Page 877 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM:STARt <LeftBorder>[, <TraceName>] DISPlay[:WINDow<Wnd>]:TRACe<WndTr>:ZOOM:STOP <RightBorder>[, <TraceName>] These commands specify the start and stop values of the zoom window (left and right border), respectively. In contrast to manual control, all or part of the zoom window may be outside the original diagram.

  • Page 878: Format Commands

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Boolean> Enable or disable the zoom. OFF also restores the original dia- gram size after a zoom function was applied. <TraceName> Optional string parameter for the trace name, e.g. 'Trc4'. If this optional parameter is present, both numeric suffixes are ignored (trace names must be unique across different channels and win- dows).

  • Page 879: Hcopy Commands

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: FORM:BORD NORM Change the byte order to normal mode. Manual operation: "Define *IDN + *OPT..." on page 580 FORMat[:DATA] <TransferFormat>[, <Length>] Selects the format for numeric data transferred to and from the analyzer. Note: The format setting is only valid for commands and queries whose description states that the response is formatted as described by FORMat[:DATA].
  • Page 880 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ................... 882 HCOPy:ITEM:MLISt[:STATe] .................... 882 HCOPy:ITEM:TIME[:STATe] ..................... 882 HCOPy:PAGE:COLor ..................883 HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:BOTTom ..................883 HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:LEFT ..................883 HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:RIGHt ................... 884 HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:TOP ..................... 884 HCOPy:PAGE:ORIentation ....................884 HCOPy:PAGE:WINDow HCOPy:DESTination <PrinterName> Selects a printer name or file as destination for the screen output. Parameters: <PrinterName>...
  • Page 881 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: HCOP:DEV:LANG BMP Select Windows bitmap format for printer files. MMEM:NAME 'C:\Screenshots\PLOT1.BMP' Define a printer file name and specify an existing directory (with- out creating the file). HCOP:DEST 'MMEM'; :HCOP Select 'Print to file' and create the printer file specified before. HCOPy[:IMMediate] Initializes the print according to the current HCOPy...
  • Page 882 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference HCOPy:ITEM:MLISt[:STATe] <Boolean> Qualifies whether or not the printed output contains the information in the marker info field (marker list). Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - marker list is included or excluded. *RST: n/a (*RST does not affect the printer configuration) Example: HCOP:ITEM:ALL Select the complete information to be printed.
  • Page 883 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference BWLStyles Black and white with white background and different line styles BWSolid Black and white with white background and black solid lines PBWLstyles Printer optimized black and white with different line styles PCLBackgrnd Printer-optimized color scheme with light background ON | OFF For compatibility with previous versions of this command: ON =...
  • Page 884 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <RightMargin> Right margin Range: 0.01 mm to 10000 mm *RST: n/a (*RST does not affect the printer configuration) Example: HCOP:PAGE:MARG:LEFT 10; RIGHT 10 Set an left and a right margin of 1 cm. HCOPy:PAGE:MARGin:TOP <UppMargin>...

  • Page 885: Initiate Commands

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: HCOP:PAGE:WIND SING; :HCOP Select one diagram per page and start printing. 7.3.8 INITiate commands The INITiate... commands control the initiation of the trigger system and define the scope of the triggered measurement....................885 INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous ....................886...
  • Page 886 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: Alternative settings using the R&S ZVAB compatibility mode: *RST; :SYSTem:LANGuage 'ZVABT' *RST; :INIT:CONT OFF Activate single sweep mode for all channels (including channel no. 2 created later). INIT:SCOP SING State that a single sweep will be performed in the active chan- nel.
  • Page 887 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference INITiate<Ch>[:IMMediate][:DUMMy] Starts a new single sweep sequence. This command is available in single sweep mode only (INITiate<Ch>:CONTinuous OFF). The data of the last sweep (or previous sweeps, see Chapter 8.2.4.3, "Retrieving the results of previous sweeps", on page 1193) can be read using CALCulate<Chn>:DATA:NSWeep:FIRSt?

  • Page 888: Instrument Commands

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CHANnel Pipeline enabled for alternated driving mode Manual operation: "Pipelining" on page 387 7.3.9 INSTrument commands The INSTrument... commands select or query particular resources (SCPI: logical instruments) of the analyzer...................... 888 INSTrument:NSELect ....................

  • Page 889: Memory Commands

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference 0 (query) – no RF connection to a switch matrix Example: SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:SMATrix: CONFigure:STARt INSTrument:TPORt:COUNt? Returns the total number of test ports. In absence of switch matrices, i.e. if no RF connection to a switch matrix is configured, this is identical to the number of VNA ports (see INSTrument:PORT:COUNt?).
  • Page 890 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference MEMory:CATalog:COUNt? Returns the number of loaded recall sets. Usage: Query only MEMory:DEFine <Name> Creates a new recall set<Name> using default settings for the traces, channels and diagram areas. The created recall set becomes the active recall set. Setting parameters: <Name>...

  • Page 891: Mmemory Commands

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST; :MEM:DEF 'SET_2' Create a recall set named "SET_2" and make it the active recall set. MEM:SEL 'Set1' Activate the default recall set"Set1". MMEM:STOR:STAT 1, 'C:\Users\Public\ Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\RecallSets\ Set1.znx'; :MEM:DEL 'Set1.znx' Store the active recall set"Set1" to a file, renaming it Set1.znx. Close the recall set.
  • Page 892 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ................893 MMEMory:AKAL:FACTory:CONVersion ................893 MMEMory:AKAL:USER:CONVersion .......................894 MMEMory:CATalog? ....................895 MMEMory:CATalog:ALL? ....................895 MMEMory:CDIRectory ....................895 MMEMory:CKIT:INFO? ......................896 MMEMory:COPY ......................896 MMEMory:DATA ......................896 MMEMory:DELete ..................897 MMEMory:DELete:CORRection .....................897 MMEMory:FAVorite<FavId> ....................898 MMEMory:LOAD:CABLe ....................898 MMEMory:LOAD:CKIT ..................899 MMEMory:LOAD:CKIT:SDATa ................900 MMEMory:LOAD:CKIT:SDATa:WLABel...
  • Page 893 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference .....................921 MMEMory:STORe:MARKer ....................922 MMEMory:STORe:RIPPle ...................922 MMEMory:STORe:SEGMent ....................922 MMEMory:STORe:STATe ....................923 MMEMory:STORe:TRACe ................924 MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:CHANnel ..............925 MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:OPTion:BALanced ..............925 MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:OPTion:SYMMetric ..............926 MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:OPTion:COMMent ............926 MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:OPTion:DECimals:DATA .............926 MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:OPTion:DECimals:STIMulus ..............926 MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:OPTion:FORMat ................. 927 MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:OPTion:PLUS ..............927 MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:OPTion:SSEParator .................
  • Page 894 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference – If an empty string (' ') is specified, the factory cal kit file stored in the active calibration unit (SYSTem:COMMunicate: RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess) is used. By default this file is also used in manual control. –...
  • Page 895 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference MMEMory:CATalog:ALL? [<Directory>] Returns the contents of the current or of a specified directory and all subdirectories. The information is returned in the following format: Directory of <Directory>, <Used Size>, <FreeDiskSpace>{,<FileEntry>}{,<DirectoryEn- try>}{,Directory of <Subdirectory>, <Used Size>, <FreeDiskSpace>{,<FileEntry>} {,<DirectoryEntry>}} See also MMEMory:CATalog?.
  • Page 896 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <Detail> CONNector | LABel | NAME | GENDer If specified, the command only returns the corresponding prop- erty Return values: <ConnectorType> <CalKitName> <KitLabel> <Gender> 1: has a gender 0: doesn't have a gender Usage: Query only MMEMory:COPY <SourceFile>, <NewFile>...
  • Page 897 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Setting parameters: <File> Mandatory string parameter containing the path and file name of the removed file. If the path is omitted, the current directory is used (see MMEMory:CDIRectory). <Force> FORCe Optional parameter, allows you to delete read-only files, too. Example: MMEM:DEL 'C:\Users\Public\TEST01.HCP' Remove file TEST01.HCP from the directory C:...
  • Page 898 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: :MMEMory:CDIRectory DEFault :MMEM:FAV1 'RecallSets\My_RecallSet1.znx' Sets My_RecallSet1.znx at position 1 of the favorites list. MMEM:FAV1? Returns 'C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\ Vna\RecallSets\My_RecallSet1.znx' MMEM:FAV1 'RecallSets\My_RecallSet2.znx' Sets My_RecallSet2.znx as favorite 1, overwriting the previ- ous favorite 1 MMEM:FAV1 '' Clears position 1 of the favorites list MMEM:FAV1? Returns ''...
  • Page 899 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: MMEM:LOAD:CKIT 'C:\Users\Public\Documents \Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\Calibration\Kits\New_kit.calkit' Load the previously created cal kit file New_kit.calkit from the default cal kit directory..:MMEM:STOR:CKIT 'New_kit', 'C: \Users\Public\Documents \Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\Calibration\Kits\New_kit.calkit' Store the data for the user-defined cal kit Newkit and overwrite the cal kit file New_kit.calkit.
  • Page 900 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: MMEM:LOAD:CKIT:SDAT 'N 50 Ohm','Default Kit',MOPEN,'Test data','test.s1p',1 Load the file Test.s1p from the current directory in order to define the properties of an Open (m) standard in the cal kit named "Default Kit" for the N 50 Ω connector type. Assign the label "Test data"...
  • Page 901 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <TouchstoneFile> String parameter to specify the name and directory of the Touch- stone file to be loaded. A *.s1p file must be used for one-port standards, a *.s2p file for two-port standards. If no path is specified the analyzer searches the current direc- tory, to be queried with MMEMory:CDIRectory <FirstPort>...
  • Page 902 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: MMEM:LOAD:CKIT:UDIR 'C:\Users\Public\Documents \Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\Calibration\Kits\Autoload' Specifiy the directory for additionally available cal kits. MMEM:MDIR 'C:\Users\Public\Documents \Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\Calibration\Kits\Autoload' Create the specified "Autoload" directory. MMEM:STOR:CKIT 'New Kit 1', 'C: \Users\Public\Documents \Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\Calibration\Kits\Autoload \New Kit 1.calkit' Store the data for the existing, user-defined cal kit "New Kit 1" to the "Autoload"...
  • Page 903 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Channel> Channel number of an existing channel. ALL applies the selected data set to all channels. <CalGroupFile> String parameter to specify the name of the cal group file to be loaded. Cal group files must have the extension *.cal. The directory path must not be specified;...
  • Page 904 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <CalGroupFile> String parameters with the names of the merged cal group files. Cal group files must have the extension *.cal. The file exten- sions must be specified as part of the string parameters. In con- trast the directory path must not be specified;...
  • Page 905 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <CalGroupFile> Optional string parameter to specify the name of the cal group file. Cal group files must have the extension *.cal. The direc- tory must not be specified; the analyzer always uses the default path C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna \Calibration\Data.
  • Page 906 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <Trace> Optional string parameter: For multiport Touchstone files (*.snp, n > 1), the parameter refers to a particular S-parame- ter trace ('S11', 'S12', ...). For ASCII (*.csv) files, the parameter references a trace name in the file (case sensitive). If the parameter is omitted, the first trace in the specified file is imported.
  • Page 907 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <ResponseOffset> Response offset for limit lines loaded from a Touchstone file. A 1 dB offset shifts the limit line by 1 dB in (positive) vertical direc- tion. Range: Depending on the measured quantity. *RST: Default unit: NN <LimLineType>...
  • Page 908 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Setting parameters: <TraceName> Name of an existing trace in the active setup (string parameter). The imported ripple limit line is assigned to this trace, irrespec- tive of the trace information in the ripple limit file. *RST: <RippleLimFile>...
  • Page 909 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: Assume that the current recall set contains two channels num- bered 1 and 2, respectively, and that sweep segments have been defined for channel no. 1. MMEM:STOR:SEGM 1, 'C:\Users\Public\Documents\ Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\SweepSegments\Seg_Ch1.SegList' Store the sweep segment definition of channel 1 to a sweep segment file.
  • Page 910 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Setting parameters: <Destination Name of an existing data trace in the active recall set (string TraceName> parameter). The trace data is loaded into a memory trace asso- ciated with the specified data trace. If one or more memory traces are already associated with the specified data trace, the last generated memory trace is overwritten.
  • Page 911 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Setting parameters: <TraceFile> String parameter to specify the name and directory of the trace file to be loaded. Several file formats for trace files are suppor- ted. The file extensions *.s<n>p, *.csv, and *.dat for Touch- stone, ASCII, and Matlab files are mandatory.
  • Page 912 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference FPORts (or omitted) Standard interpretation: odd port numbers towards VNA, even port numbers towards DUT IPORts For s2p files IPORts means "inverted port sequence": network port 2 towards VNA, network port 1 towards DUT For s4p files IPORts means "increasing port sequence": low port numbers towards VNA, high port numbers towards DUT SGATes...
  • Page 913 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference FPORts (or omitted) Standard port sequence (network port 1 towards VNA, network port 2 towards DUT) IPORts | SGATes Inverted port sequence (network port 2 towards VNA, network port 1 towards DUT) Example: MMEM:LOAD:VNET1:DIFF:EMBM1 'C:\Users\Public\ Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\Embedding\Test.s2p' Load a Touchstone file.
  • Page 914 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir:DEEMbedding<ListId>: TNDefinition CALCulate<Ch>:TRANsform:VNETworks:PPAir: to select the desired circuit model before EMBedding<ListId>:TNDefinition loading the data files. ● For any n-port set, the FIMPort model requires a single *.s<2n>p file and hence a single set command. ●...
  • Page 915 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST; :CALC:TRAN:VNET:PPA:DEEM:DEF 1,2,3,4 Define a port pair configuration with port pairs (1,2) and (3,4). CALC:TRAN:VNET:PPA:DEEM2:TND STSL Select the Serial Touchstone .s2p data, shunt L circuit mode for the second port pair. MMEM:LOAD:VNET:PPA:DEEM2 'C: \Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\Traces\Test.s2p', PMA Load a Touchstone file and assign it to the second port pair.
  • Page 916 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "File Name 1 / Swap Gates" on page 455 MMEMory:MDIRectory <NewDirectory> Creates a new subdirectory for mass memory storage in an existing directory. Setting parameters: <NewDirectory> String parameter to specify the new directory. Either the full path or a subdirectory for the current directory (see MMEMory: CDIRectory).
  • Page 917 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference MMEMory:MSIS <Drive> is equivalent to <Drive>. In par- MMEMory:CDIRectory ticular, it sets the current directory to the base directory of the specified drive. Parameters: <Drive> Drive letter, followed by a colon, e.g. 'D:' Example: MMEMory:CDIRectory DEFault selects the default directory...
  • Page 918 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference MMEMory:STORe:CABLe <OutputDir> Saves all predefined and user-defined Distance to Fault (DtF) cable types to the speci- fied output directory. Each DtF cable type is stored in a separate ASCII file <cable name>.rsc. The com- mand silently overwrites files of the same name previously existing in the output direc- tory.
  • Page 919 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference MMEMory:STORe:CKIT:WLABel <CalKitName>, <KitLabel>, <CalKitFile> Stores the data of a calibration kit to a specified file. The calibration kit is identified by its name and label. Setting parameters: <CalKitName> Name of a user-defined calibration kit available on the analyzer. Tip: It is not possible to modify or store predefined or ideal kits.
  • Page 920 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <CalGroupFile> String parameter to specify the name of the created cal group file. There is no need to specify the directory path and file exten- sion; the analyzer uses the default cal pool directory C:\Users\Public\Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna \Calibration\Data and a *.cal extension.
  • Page 921 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference MMEMory:STORe:LIMit <TraceName>, <LimLineFile> Saves the limit lines associated to a specified trace to a limit line file. Limit lines are created using the CALCulate<Chn>:LIMit... commands. Setting parameters: <TraceName> Name of an existing trace in the active recall set (string parame- ter) for which a limit line definition exists.
  • Page 922 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference MMEMory:STORe:RIPPle <TraceName>, <RippleLimFile> Saves the ripple limits associated with a specified trace to a ripple limit file. Ripple limit definitions are created using the CALCulate<Chn>:RIPPle... commands. Setting parameters: <TraceName> Name of an existing trace in the active setup (string parameter) for which a ripple limit definition exists.
  • Page 923 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <RecallSetFile> String parameter to specify the absolute or relative path of the created recall set file. Relative paths are evaluated relative to the current directory (see MMEMory:CDIRectory). The default extension for recall set files is znx. Unless you specify znxml as file name extension, recall sets are always stored in znx file format.
  • Page 924 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference If the second optional parameter is omitted, the command stores complex data. <DecSeparator> POINt | COMMa POINt - decimal separator: point. COMMa - decimal separator: comma. If the third optional parameter is omitted, points are used. <FieldSeparator>...
  • Page 925 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <FormatInd> FORMatted | UNFormatted UNFormatted - unformatted data export specified by the second optional parameter. FORMatted - formatted data export (for *.csv and *.dat files only). If the first optional parameter is omitted, the command stores unformatted data.
  • Page 926 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Boolean> MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:OPTion:COMMent <Comment> Defines a comment to be added to (the comment section of) exported trace files. This is a global setting, i.e. the comment string is used for each trace export in every open recall set.
  • Page 927 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference MMEMory:STORe:TRACe:OPTion:PLUS <arg0> This command defines how positive numbers are prefixed during Touchstone file export: by a leading space, a plus sign or not at all. Parameters: <arg0> SPACe | PLUS | VOID Manual operation: "Positive Number Prefix"...

  • Page 928: Output Commands

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference The command fails unless the conditions for Touchstone file export are met; see "Con- ditions for Touchstone file export" on page 141. Traces are created using the command. CALCulate<Ch>:PARameter:SDEFine Setting parameters: <Channel> Channel number in the active recall set. <TouchstoneFile>...
  • Page 929 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference .....................929 OUTPut<Ch>[:STATe] ....................929 OUTPut:UPORt:ECBits ..............929 OUTPut<Ch>:UPORt:SEGMent<Seg>:STATe ..............930 OUTPut<Ch>:UPORt:SEGMent<Seg>[:VALue] ..................931 OUTPut<Ch>:UPORt[:VALue] OUTPut<Ch>[:STATe] <Boolean> Turns the internal source power at all ports on or off. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number. This suffix is ignored; the setting is valid for all channels.
  • Page 930 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: OUTPut<Ch>:UPORt:SEGMent<Seg>[:VALue] on page 930 Manual operation: "Optional Columns" on page 378 OUTPut<Ch>:UPORt:SEGMent<Seg>[:VALue] <BinValue> Sets or queries a sweep segment-dependent four-bit binary value to control four inde- pendent output signals at the USER PORT connector (lines 16, 17, 18, 19). The output signals are 3.3 V TTL signals which can be used to differentiate between up to 16 inde- pendent analyzer states for each channel.
  • Page 931 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference #B0010 - output signal at pin 17 #B0011 - output signal at pin 16 and 17 #B1111 - output signal at pin 16, 17, 18 and 19 Range: #B0000 to #B1111 (for setting command), 0 to 15 (query) *RST: #B0000 (0)
  • Page 932 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ● The signals are switched on as soon as a measurement (sweep) in a channel with non-zero channel bits is started. They are changed whenever a channel with differ- ent channel bits becomes the measuring channel. ●...

  • Page 933: Program Commands

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference 7.3.13 PROGram commands The PROGram... commands control external application programs that can be run on the analyzer..................933 PROGram[:SELected]:EXECute .................. 934 PROGram[:SELected]:INIMessage ................934 PROGram[:SELected]:INIParameter ..................935 PROGram[:SELected]:NAME ..................936 PROGram[:SELected]:RETVal? ....................936 PROGram[:SELected]:WAIT PROGram[:SELected]:EXECute <AppName>...
  • Page 934 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: PROGram:SELected:NAME PROG Select general program execution. PROGram:SELected:EXECute 'Exit42.bat' Run batch script Exit42.bat. PROGram:SELected:WAIT? Lock command execution and manual control of the analyzer until the batch job has finished. This is required for PROGram:SELected:RETVal? Get the return value.
  • Page 935 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference This command can be used to supply information to an external application launched by :PROGram[:SELected]:EXECute. The query must be sent with a single <Key> value. It reads the value associated with the key from the [PARAMETER] section of the preferences file specified by <file_path>.

  • Page 936: Sense:] Commands

    ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference PROGram[:SELected]:RETVal? Queries the return value of an application or process started via PROGram[: SELected]:EXECute. This will only be successful if preceded by a PROGram[:SELected]:WAIT? query (see on page 936). PROGram[:SELected]:WAIT Example: PROGram[:SELected]:EXECute Usage: Query only PROGram[:SELected]:WAIT Locks command execution from the current controller program while a program started...
  • Page 937 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Boolean> ON | OFF - enables or disables the automatic calculation of the sweep average over the specified number of sweeps ([SENSe<Ch>:]AVERage:COUNt). *RST: Example: [SENSe<Ch>:]AVERage:CLEar Manual operation: "Factor / On / Reset" on page 365 [SENSe<Ch>:]AVERage:CLEar Starts a new average cycle, clearing all previous results and thus eliminating their...
  • Page 938 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference AUTO Automatic selection between REDuce and FLATten mode, depending on the trace format. FLATten Cumulative moving averages of the (linear) magnitude and phase values, provides the most effective noise suppression for the "dB Mag", "Phase", "Unwr Phase", and "Lin Mag" formats. REDuce Cumulative moving averages of the real and imaginary parts of each measurement result, provides the most effective noise sup-...
  • Page 939 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference 7.3.14.3 [SENSe:]CDLL... Adds, removes and configures custom (external) DLLs. These commands allow you to add/remove external DLLs to/from the firmware. It gives access to their configuration, tasks, and traces......................939 [SENSe:]CDLL:ADD ..................... 939 [SENSe:]CDLL:LIST? ....................
  • Page 940 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Usage: Query only [SENSe<Ch>:]CDLL:PERManent:ADDitional <DllName>, <Additional Input> [SENSe<Ch>:]CDLL:PERManent:ADDitional? <DllName> Defines additional input for the task to be run, if custom DLL <DllName> is set to per- manent mode in channel <Ch> ([SENSe<Ch>:]CDLL:PERManent[:STATe] '<'DllName>', ON).
  • Page 941 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference to further specify the task. [SENSe<Ch>:]CDLL:PERManent:ADDitional Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Parameters: <Task> Name of the task to be run permanently. Parameters for setting and query: <DllName> Name of a loaded DLL (see [SENSe:]CDLL:LIST?) Lowercase string, without dll extension Manual operation: "Task Type"...
  • Page 942 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CDLL:TASK:ADDRess <DllName>, <Task>, <Address> [SENSe<Ch>:]CDLL:TASK:ADDRess? <DllName>, <Task> Defines the address of an external device the external DLL <DllName> requires to complete task type <Task> in channel <Ch>. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Parameters: <Address> String value with DLL-specific syntax and semantics.
  • Page 943 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference As the query does not reflect the delay mode specified using [SENSe:]CORRection: CKIT:DMODe, it is deprecated and only available for backward compatibility reasons. instead. [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:STANdard:DATA?? Suffix: <StandardType> <string> Standard type For one-port standards, the first character denotes the gender, for transmission standards the first two characters denote the genders on both ends, e.g.
  • Page 944 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Table 7-11: Set command parameters One port standards Two port standards Open (Offset) Match Reflect Sliding Symmetric Through, Attenuation Short match network Line <Con- mandatory nType> <CalKit- mandatory (and must not be an empty string) Name>...
  • Page 945 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameter Meaning Comment/Unit '<CalKitLabel>' Label (e.g. the serial number) of the calibration kit; for ...WLABel com- String parameter mand only '<StandardLa- Label (e.g. the serial number) of the standard String parameter bel>' <MinFreq>, Min./max.
  • Page 946 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <std_type> Meaning MSMatch | FSMatch Sliding match: m or f MREFlect | FREFlect Reflect: m or f MMTHrough | MFTHrough | Through: m-m or m-f or f-f FFTHrough MMLine[<1|2|3>] | MFLine[<1|2|3>] Line: m-m or m-f or f-f (three standards each) | FFLine[<1|2|3>] Suffix 1 can be omitted.
  • Page 947 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:DMODe <ConnectorType>, <CalKitName>, <KitLabel>, <Mode> Sets/gets the delay mode for the related cal kit (identified by connector type, name and label), i.e allows to toggle between ZVR compatible and Keysight modelling (see "Off- set Parameters"...
  • Page 948 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:SELect <ConnectorType>[, <CalKitName>] Selects the calibration kit to be used, specifying its connector type and name (optional). Tip: The command is suitable for connector types with arbitrary, user-defined names. For standard connector types you can use the command [SENSe:]CORRection: CKIT:<ConnType>:SELect.
  • Page 949 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <CalKitName> String parameter containing the name of a calibration kit availa- ble on the analyzer. See "Cal kit naming conventions " above. *RST: n/a (A *RST does not change the assignment between connector types and calibration kits.) Example: MMEM:LOAD:CKIT 'C:\Users\Public\ Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\...
  • Page 950 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <StandardType> MMTHrough | MFTHrough | FFTHrough | MMLine | MMLine1 | MMLine2 | MMLine3 | MFLine | MFLine1 | MFLine2 | MFLine3 | FFLine | FFLine1 | FFLine2 | FFLine3 | MMATten | MFATten | FFATten | MMSNetwork | MFSNetwork | FFSNetwork | MOPen | FOPen | MSHort | FSHort | MOSHort | MOSHort1 | MOSHort2 | MOSHort3 | FOSHort | FOSHort1 | FOSHort2 | FOSHort3 |...
  • Page 951 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:LDELete <CalKitName>, <KitLabel> Deletes an imported or user-defined cal kit which is identified by its cal kit name and label. Note: It is not possible to modify or store predefined or ideal kits. Setting parameters: <CalKitName>...
  • Page 952 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: CORR:CKIT:FOP:WLAB 'N 50 Ohm','New Kit 1', 'Test kit created today', '', 0,4000000000,0,0,50,99,-2.3,0.22,0,0,0,0,0 Create a new cal kit "New Kit 1" labelled "Test kit created today" and assign an open (f) standard for the N 50 Ω connector type with specific properties.
  • Page 953 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: MMEM:LOAD:CKIT 'C:\Users\Public\ Documents\Rohde-Schwarz\Vna\ Calibration\Kits\New Kit 1 (123456).calkit' Load the previously created cal kit file New Kit 1 (123456).calkit from the default cal kit direc- tory. CORR:CKIT:LSEL 'N 50 Ohm', 'New Kit 1', '123456' Assign the imported kit to the N 50 Ω...
  • Page 954 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Manual operation: "Add / Copy / Delete / Standards..." on page 420 [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT:STANdard:LCATalog? <CalKitName>, <KitLabel> Returns a list of all standards in a given calibration kit. Query parameters: <CalKitName> Name of the cal kit. Use [SENSe:]CORRection:CKIT: to query cal kit names and labels.
  • Page 955 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Query parameters: <OnePort MOPen | FOPen | MSHort | FSHort | MOSHort | MOSHort1 | StandardType> MOSHort2 | MOSHort3 | FOSHort | FOSHort1 | FOSHort2 | FOSHort3 | MREFlect | FREFlect | MMTCh | FMTCh | MSMatch | FSMatch Standard type.
  • Page 956 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ..........957 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]:SELected ..............958 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO ......959 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment<Asg>:ACQuire .......959 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment:ALL:COUNt? ........960 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment:COUNt? ......960 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment<Asg>:DEFine ......962 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment:DEFine:DEFault ....963 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment<Asg>:DEFine:TPORt ....964 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment:DEFine:TPORt:DEFault ........ 964 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment:DELete:ALL ..............964 [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CKIT ............. 965 [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CKIT:PASSword ............
  • Page 957 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]:SELected <Type>, <TestPort>[, <SecondPortOrAdapter>[, <Dispersion>[, <DelayTimePhase>]]] Starts the acquisition of measurement data for the selected standard and port(s). The standards are reflection or transmission standards and can be connected to arbitrary analyzer ports. Note: ●...
  • Page 958 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference AUTO - the analyzer determines the delay time or phase during the calibration sweep. <delay or phase> - entry of the delay time in ps (for non-disper- sive standards) or of the phase at the start frequency of the sweep in deg (for dispersive standards).
  • Page 959 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel Setting parameters: <Characterization> Location of the characterization (cal kit file) to be used for the automatic calibration (string parameter): – If an empty string (' ') is specified, the factory cal kit file stored in the active calibration unit is used.
  • Page 960 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Chapter 4.5.5.6, "Multiple port assignments", on page 173 for background infor- mation. Note: to get the [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment:COUNt? number of port assignments of the "current" calibration. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Example: Chapter 8.2.5.2, "MultiCal (with calibration unit)", on page 1196 Usage:...
  • Page 961 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference ● [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment:DEFine:DEFault [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment:DEFine: to create the default assignments instead. TPORt:DEFault Chapter 4.5.5.6, "Multiple port assignments", on page 173 for background infor- mation. Suffix: <Ch> Number of the channel <Asg> Number of the port assignment Parameters: <TestPort1>...
  • Page 962 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: Let's perform a full 3-port calibration with a two-port calibration unit, using factory characterization and the port assignments given in the table below. Prerequisite: the adequate calibration unit was selected before using SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess SENSe1:CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment: DELete:ALL...
  • Page 963 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Note that during the corresponding calibration sweep the R&S ZND expects the physi- cal port connections to be established exactly as specified by the created port assign- ments. ● [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment:DEFine:TPORt: on page 964 to use auto-detection instead of defining "test port --> cal DEFault unit port"-connections explicitely ●...
  • Page 964 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment:DEFine:TPORt:DEFault <TestPort1>[, <TestPort2>]... Similar logic as [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:ASSignment: DEFine:DEFault, but initially defines the default port assignments only by their underlying test port set(s); the connected calibration unit ports are auto-detected at the start of the corresponding calibration sweep. The number of created assignments can be queried using the [SENSe<Ch>: command.
  • Page 965 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Note that this command can only be executed if the number of cal unit ports is less or equal to the number of test ports. Furthermore the command assumes the "canonical" assignment of cal unit ports to test ports: cal unit port 1 assigned to test port 1, cal unit port 2 assigned to test port 2 etc.
  • Page 966 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: SENSe:CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CKIT:PASSword 'My_password' Enter a password My_password (assuming that password pro- tection has been activated manually). SENSe:CORRection:COLLect:AUTO '', 1, 2 Perform an automatic 2-port calibration at test ports 1 and 2 using the calibration unit's default calibration kit file and auto- matic port assignment.
  • Page 967 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CKIT:PORTs:ADD <Characterization>, <TestPort1>, <CalUnitPort1>[, <TestPort2>]... Extends or modifies an existing characterization of the active calibration unit (SYSTem: COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:ADDRess). This functionality is not available at the GUI. Setting parameters: <Characterization> Location of an existing characterization (e.g. created using [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CKIT:PORTs).
  • Page 968 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:CONFigure <CalType>, <Characterization>[, <CalName>] Selects a calibration type and a cal unit characterization (cal kit file) for an automatic calibration. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel Parameters: <CalType> FNPort | TOSM | FOPort | OPTPort | FRTRans | FTRans | RTRans | REFL | RSHort Calibration Type FNPort...
  • Page 969 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference – A VNA cal kit file name *.calkit with path refers to a spe- cific cal kit file stored in an arbitrary directory on the analyzer. Note that for inline calibration systems this setting is ignored. The suitable, ICU-specific characterizations must be specified using SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice:AKAL:CKIT.
  • Page 970 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs <Characterization>, <TestPort1>, <CalUnitPort1>[, <TestPort2>]... Selects and initiates an automatic calibration at arbitrary analyzer and calibration unit ports. A progress monitor for the calibration sweeps is displayed. Tip: ● This command is necessary if the analyzer fails to detect the cal unit ports connec- ted to each of its ports (e.g.
  • Page 971 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:PORTs:CONNection? Returns the assignment between the physical analyzer ports and the ports of the con- nected automatic calibration unit. Example: CORR:COLL:AUTO:PORT '', 1, 2 Perform an automatic 1-port calibration at analyzer port 1, using the calibration unit's default calibration kit file and port 2 of the cal unit.
  • Page 972 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <TestPort1> Test port number. For an n-port automatic calibration, n arbitrary (not necessarily consecutive) port numbers must be specified. For a one path two port calibration (OPTPort), the first port no. denotes the source port (fully calibrated port). <CalUnitPort1>...
  • Page 973 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO: ASSignment<Asg>:DEFine Usage: Event Manual operation: "Apply/Cancel" on page 399 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:AUTO:TEMPcomp <Boolean> Available if the calibration unit selected using SYSTem:COMMunicate:RDEVice: is an inline calibration system (ICS) only. Applies to all inline calibra- AKAL:ADDRess tion units (ICUs) that are connected to the selected ICS and that are used with factory characterization data .
  • Page 974 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference – A VNA cal kit file name *.calkit without path refers to a specific cal kit file stored in the internal memory of the active cal- ibration unit. – A VNA cal kit file name without path but prefixed with "SD:" refers to a specific cal kit file stored on the SD card inserted at the active calibration unit.
  • Page 975 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:CHANnels:ALL <Boolean> Enables calibration of all channels in the active recall set. The command is valid for the following calibration methods: ● Manual system error correction ● Automatic system error correction (cal unit) A scalar power calibration is not affected.
  • Page 976 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: Suppose that there are 3 channels in the current recall set and you want to calibrate channels 1 and 2. For channel 1, you want to perform a Reflection Normalization (Short) on ports 1 and 2, for channel 2 an OSM calibration on port 2.
  • Page 977 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CKIT:INSTall <CalKitFile>, <Gender>[, <Ports>] Allows you to load cal kit data by gender: ● From the given file ● To the given ports or all ports on page 895 to get information about cal kit files. MMEMory:CKIT:INFO? Suffix: <Ch>...
  • Page 978 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Query parameters: <Detail> CONNector | LABel | NAME | GENDer Queried property Return values: <Result> Usage: Query only [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection<PhyPt> <ConnectorType> Selects a connector type at a specified port <PhyPt> and its gender. Tip: Use to select [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SCONnection<PhyPt>...
  • Page 979 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:CONNection:GENDers <Gender> Qualifies whether the genders at the test ports (but not their connector types) are equal or independent. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel Parameters: <Gender> ALL | SINGle ALL – equal (uniform) genders. If the gender at one port is changed, the connector type at all other ports is changed accordingly.
  • Page 980 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:DELete [<CalName>] Deletes system error correction data generated and stored previously. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel Setting parameters: <CalName> Name of the calibration (string parameter) defined together with the calibration type ([SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect: METHod:DEFine).
  • Page 981 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:DISCard Terminates a system error correction, discarding the acquired data. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel Example: :SENSe1:CORRection:COLLect:METHod:DEFine 'Test', TOSM, 1, 2 :SENSe1:CORRection:COLLect:ACQuire:SELected THRough, 1, 2 :SENSe1:CORRection:COLLect:ACQuire:SELected OPEN, :SENSe1:CORRection:COLLect:ACQuire:SELected SHORt, :SENSe1:CORRection:COLLect:ACQuire:SELected MATCh, :SENSe1:CORRection:COLLect:ACQuire:SELected OPEN,...
  • Page 982 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: *RST; CORR:COLL:FIXT:LMP:LOSS OFF Configure a fixture compensation measurement (for all chan- nels): The analyzer performs an Auto Length (no loss) calcula- tion. CORR:COLL:FIXT:ACQ OPEN, 2; :CORR:COLL:FIXT:ACQ SHOR, 4 Perform a fixture compensation sweep at port 2, terminated with an open standard, and at port 4, terminated with a short.
  • Page 983 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Table 7-14: Direct Compensation data #TestPorts File Type >=1 For 1-port Touchstone files (*.s1p) only a single test port can be specified - otherwise an error is raised. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Parameters: <FixtureFile>...
  • Page 984 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameters: <Boolean> 1 - Auto Length (and Loss), depending on the last [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:FIXTure: LMParameter:LOSS[:STATe] setting 0 - Direct Compensation *RST: Example: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:FIXTure[: ACQuire] Manual operation: "Direct Compensation" on page 465 [SENSe:]CORRection:COLLect:FIXTure:LMParameter:LOSS[:STATe] <Boolean> Selects an Auto Length or an Auto Length and Loss calculation. Parameters: <Boolean>...
  • Page 985 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Usage: Event Manual operation: "Measure Fixture wizard" on page 466 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:LOAD:SELected <CalGroupFile>, <Standard>, <TestPort1>[, <SecondPortOrAdapter>] Reloads a set of previously acquired calibration data for a particular standard from a file in the cal pool. The loaded data may be combined with new calibration measure- ment data ([SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]:SELected) in order to simplify and speed up the new calibration procedure.
  • Page 986 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: Suppose that the cal pool contains a file 'Calgroup3.cal' with a valid through calibration for the active channel no. 1, which you want to include in a new TOSM calibration for ports 1 and 2.
  • Page 987 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <TestPort1> First calibrated test port number. For an n-port calibration type, n port numbers must be specified. If more than n numbers are defined, the spare numbers (the last ones in the list) are ignored. Entering less than n numbers causes an error message.
  • Page 988 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Parameter Type (GUI) UOSM UOSM TRL | TOM | TSM | TRM | TNA TRL | TOM | TSM | TRM | TNA [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected:DEFault Generates a set of default correction data for the selected ports and calibration type. The default data set corresponds to a test setup which does not introduce any system- atic errors;...
  • Page 989 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:SAVE:SELected[:DUMMy] Calculates the system error correction data from the acquired measurement results ([SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]:SELected), stores it and applies it to the calibrated channel(s). To avoid incompatibilities, older system error cor- rection data is deleted unless it has been transferred into a cal pool (MMEMory: STORe:CORRection <Ch>, '<file_name>').
  • Page 990 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference <Gender> MALE | FEMale Gender of the connectors. The gender designation is not neces- sary (and ignored) for sexless connector types. Example: *RST; :CORR:COLL:SCON1 'N 75 Ohm', MALE; SCON4? Change the connector type at port 1 from 'N 50 Ohm', FEM to 'N 75 Ohm', MALE.
  • Page 991 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CDATa <ErrorTerm>, <SourcePort>, <LoadPort>, <CorrectionData>... Writes or reads system error correction data for a specific channel <Ch>, calibration method ([SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:COLLect:METHod:DEFine), and port combi- nation <SourcePort>, <LoadPort>. The setting command can be used to transfer user-defined correction data <CorrectionData>...
  • Page 992 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel. Parameters: <ErrorTerm> String parameters describing the different error terms, depend- ing on the current calibration method; see table below. Each term contains one complex value (real and imaginary part) for each sweep point.
  • Page 993 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Calibration type Parameters in Available error terms (depending on port num- [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection: bers) COLLect:METHod:DEFine One-port normalization (reflection) REFL, RSHort 'REFLTRACK' using an open or a short standard Full one port ("Refl OSM") FOPort 'DIRECTIVITY', 'SRCMATCH', 'REFLTRACK' Two-port normalization FRTRans...
  • Page 994 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Example: CORR:CONN 'USERCON',TEM,GEND,1.00000,50 Define a TEM type connector type named USERCON. CORR:CONN? 'USERCON' Query the properties of the configured connector type. CORR:CONN:DEL 'USERCON' Delete the configured connector type. Manual operation: "Connector / Gender" on page 403 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:CATalog? Returns a list of the connector types of all calibration kits in use.
  • Page 995 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection:DELete <ConnectorName> Deletes a user-defined connector type named <ConnectorName>. Suffix: <Ch> Channel number Setting parameters: <ConnectorName> Name of the user-defined connectors, string parameter. Example: [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:CONNection Usage: Setting only Manual operation: "Connector / Gender" on page 403 [SENSe<Ch>:]CORRection:DATA:PARameter<Sfk>? [<SfkSettingType>[, <Index>]] Gets the settings of the active system error correction (or of the factory calibration, if no...
  • Page 996 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference PDLY Point delay (Meas Delay) for OSM RATTenuation Receiver attenuations: comma-separated list containing a value pair <port no.>,<rec. att.> (float,integer) for each of the involved PORTs TYPE Calibration type (see <Type> parameter in [SENSe<Ch>: ]CORRection:COLLect[:ACQuire]:SELected on page 957)
  • Page 997 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference CKIT If created with FW version 2.30 or higher, for each port the name of the used calibration kit is stored with a calibration. The query can return one of the following: the cal kit name (string) if available and unique 'Multiple' if cal kit names are available but not unique, i.e.
  • Page 998 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number of the calibrated channel Example: CORR:COLL:METH REFL1 Select a one-port normalization at port 1 as calibration type. CORR:COLL OPEN1 Measure an open standard connected to port 1 and store the measurement results of this standard.
  • Page 999 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Setting parameters: <Activate> ONCE Applies the auto length function. Example: *RST; :CORR:EDEL:AUTO ONCE Reset the instrument and apply the auto length function to the default trace (Trc1 in channel 1). Usage: Setting only Manual operation: "Auto Length"...
  • Page 1000 ® Command reference R&S SCPI command reference Suffix: <Ch> Channel number of the offset-corrected channel <PhyPt> Port number of the analyzer Parameters: <ElecLength> Electrical length Range: -1E+9 m to +1E+9 m. Increment: 1 mm *RST: Default unit: m Example: CORR:EDEL2:ELEN 0.3 Define an electrical length of 30 cm for channel 1 and port no.

This manual is also suitable for:

Znd

Table of Contents